BBM en-GB 2015.4

Bus Builders Manual
F-series
Bus Bodybuilding Instructions
2015.4
Introduction
1.1 Scania's business concept and environmental policy

Scania's business concept
Scania's business concept is to offer high quality
heavy vehicles and services to its customers for the
efficient road haulage of goods and passengers.
Through focusing on the customer needs, producing high-quality products and services, and maintaining respect for the individual, Scania creates
added value for customers and continues to grow
with consistent profitability.
Scania's activities are aimed at developing and
manufacturing vehicles designed to lead the market in terms of performance and operating efficiency throughout the vehicle's life cycle, combined
with high quality and environment-friendly features.
Scania's sales and service organisation aims to provide customers with vehicles and services having
the highest availability at the lowest cost while retaining favourable environmental features
throughout the economic life of the vehicle.
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.1 Scania's business concept and environmental policy > Scania's business concept
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
1.1 Scania's business concept and environmental policy

Scania's environmental policy
Scania is continually improving the environmental
performance of its products, processes and services. This improvement effort is based on commercial and other considerations where the observance
of legal requirements is fundamental. Scania's environmental work is proactive and is based on a
life cycle perspective. For further information
about Scania's regulations for chemical substances, see Scania's blacklist (STD4158) and Scania's
grey list (STD4159). For more information see the
Attachment. Scania's blacklist specifies chemical
substances that must not be used. Scania's grey list
specifies chemical substances that may only be
used to a limited extent.
For further information on Scania's regulations for

chemical substances, see (only in English and
Swedish):
Chemical substances that must not be used: Scania's blacklist (STD 4158).
Chemical substances with limited use: Scania's
grey list (STD 4159).
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.1 Scania's business concept and environmental policy > Scania's environmental policy
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
1.2 Scania's bus bodybuilding instructions

Liability
REQUIREMENT!
Modifications of the chassis or its systems, which

are not described in the instructions, must not be
made without permission from Scania CV AB.
If the bus bodybuilder wishes to carry out a modification and deviate from the standard version of
the chassis then he must contact Scania, busbuilderhelp.sweden@scania.com, and fill in a deviation
report. The specimen document "Deviation request" is available in the BBM via SAIL. The bus
bodybuilder must obtain written approval for the
modification.
Scania's bus chassis have been developed in accordance with Scania's product policy and in close
cooperation with bus bodybuilders.
The purpose of the following bus bodybuilding instructions is to make it easier for bus bodybuilders
to achieve the quality expected by Scania customers.
Bus bodybuilding instructions

Scania retains the right to modify products without
simultaneously amending the bus bodybuilding instructions. However, these are always adjusted afterwards and as soon as feasibly possible.
Due to product modifications it is extremely important that the bus bodybuilder makes sure to
have access to the latest issue of the Scania Bus
Builder's Manual and attendant documentation.
Old versions of BBM and related documentation
can be obtained via:
busbuilderhelp.brazil@scania.com
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.2 Scania's bus bodybuilding instructions > Liability
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
REQUIREMENT!
The bus bodybuilder must follow Scania's requirements which are described in the bus bodybuilding
instructions and comply with national laws and
regulations when bus bodybuilding with Scania's
chassis.
REQUIREMENT!
The functionality and quality of chassis components must remain unimpaired after bus bodybuilding.
Scania's responsibility
The bus bodybuilding instructions contain Scania
requirements, recommendations and advice for
bus bodybuilding.
Note the warning symbols
Note:
The BBM contains symbols that indicate dangerous or important work procedures. Always read
and follow warnings and instructions.
Used when incorrect action may result in a poor

outcome or unnecessary work.
REQUIREMENT!
Used when Scania requires that the bus bodybuilder follows the instructions in the BBM closely, in
order to guarantee safety and the validity of the
warranty.
WARNING!
Used when incorrect action may result in personal

injury.
IMPORTANT!
Used when incorrect action may result in damage

to the vehicle or other property.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
The bus bodybuilder's responsibility
The distributor's responsibility
Comments to Scania
The bus bodybuilder is answerable to its customer

for ensuring that the bus bodybuilding is carried
out in accordance with Scania's instructions and
that the finished bus fulfils the safety and legal requirements in force.
For the sale of the finished bus, the distributor is

responsible to the customer for ensuring that the
bodywork conforms to Scania's instructions and
that in other respects the vehicle meets the national
legal requirements and safety regulations in force.
Scania appreciates all suggestions for improvement as we are continually working to make the
BBM as user-friendly as possible. For feedback or
error reports, please contact:
busbuilderhelp.brazil@scania.com
IMPORTANT!
The bus bodybuilder assumes all responsibility for

modifications that have not been approved by Scania.
The bus bodybuilder is responsible, together with
the distributor in the customer's country, for all
documentation concerning the functionality, operation and maintenance of the finished bus.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
1.3 Chassis modification

Deviation request
REQUIREMENT!
Modifications to the chassis or its systems, which

are not described in the instructions, are not allowed without written permission from Scania CV
AB.
IMPORTANT!
Modifications not approved by Scania are the sole

responsibility of the bodybuilder.
To obtain permission from Scania CV AB, the following procedure shall be followed:
1.
The bodybuilder sends a deviation request to

Scania CV AB.
2. Scania CV AB looks into the request.
3. Once this investigation is complete, Scania informs the bodybuilder whether the deviation
request has been approved or rejected.
The form for the deviation request is on the BBM
web page via SAIL. Information on creating a deviation request is outlined in this chapter.
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.3 Chassis modification > Deviation request
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
Creating a deviation request

1.
Enter the SAIL portal (https://sail.scania.com). Click on Bus Builders Manual

(BBM). A new window to the TIL will open
automatically (Technical Information Library).
2. Click on deviation request (1), see figure.
322 528
1. Deviation request
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
3.
337 728
Select "Authorization request to make a chassis alteration" if you wish to request a change
in chassis components. Select "Authorization
request to deviate from the Scania Bus Builder's Manual" if you wish to request something
that differs from the BBM recommendations.
4. Fill in the form, enter the attachment and click
on "SEND".
5. When the form has been sent, a new window
will open automatically with a copy of the information sent. Copy this information so that it
can be used later.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
10
1.4 BBFS (Bus Builders Function Settings)

BBFS
REQUIREMENT!
The BBFS form must be completed by the bodybuilder and sent along with the bus for the final
BBMQA inspection at the Scania dealer.
The BBFS form is available on the BBM web page
via SAIL. This chapter describes the information
on how to get the BBFS form.
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.4 BBFS (Bus Builders Function Settings) > BBFS
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
11
How to find BBFS

1.
Enter the SAIL portal (https://sail.scania.com). Click on Bus Builders Manual

(BBM). A new window will automatically
open to the TIL (Technical Information Library).
2. Click "Search" (1), see Fig.
347 051
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
12
3.
Select "14 Appendix" in Chapter (2).
4.
Select the language (3).
5.
Click "Search" (4).
347 052
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
13
6.
Click on the orange box "Bus Builder's Function Settings (BBFS)" (5) to open the BBFS as
PDF.
For more information about completing the BBFS,
see chapter 11.7 Bodybuilder connections.
347 053
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
14
1.5 BBMQA
Bus Builder's Manual Quality Assurance
Function settings
Final function settings and inspections must be

performed on the finished bodywork in order to
ensure the quality of the bus. The bus must undergo a Quality Assurance Inspection (BBMQA) and
a delivery maintenance (DI).
There are a number of functions that the bus bodybuilder can engage in different ways. In certain
cases the settings need to be changed in the control
units. This is carried out in connection with BBMQA.
The BBMQA is mandatory and a condition for the

delivery maintenance to be carried out. In this way
the quality of the bus is assured throughout the entire manufacturing process, i.e. chassis manufacture, bus bodybuilding and delivery maintenance.
For the settings to be correct the bus bodybuilder

must provide information to the Scania workshop
that shall conduct the BBMQA. This is performed
with each bus on the specimen document entitled
BBFS (Bus Builder's Function Settings). For further information, see chapter 11.7 Bodybuilder
connections.
311 221
QA
Background
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.5 BBMQA > Bus Builder's Manual Quality Assurance
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
15
1.5 BBMQA
Inspection procedures
Scania is responsible for the training of dealers and
bus bodybuilders.
Faults detected in BBMQA inspections must be
rectified before the bus is delivered to the customer. The dealer reports defects found to the bus
bodybuilder and Scania.
The BBMQA supervisor at the dealer has access to
Scania's defect reporting system and reports via
the Internet and sends in a SOPS file (Scania Onboard Product Specification). The report must be
submitted to Scania within a week after the completed BBMQA inspection.
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.5 BBMQA > Bus Builder's Manual Quality Assurance
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
16
1.6 Transport damage

General
Global transport insurance
Scania CV AB has a global transport insurance
that covers all transport in which Scania is responsible for risk, such as chassis transport.
The insurance covers multi-risks that are in effect,
regardless of the type of transport, including when
the chassis is delivered on its own wheels.
Scania global transport insurance is in effect
around the world, except in the following countries:
Russia
Brazil
Argentina
Chile
Mexico
Morocco
China
Iran
Iraq
Transport damage claims with Scania

insurance
Whenever transport damage is found it is important that the damage is claimed with both the transport company and Scania insurance company.
Carefully read the Transport Claims Manual for
bodybuilders (Transport Claims Manual_bodybuilder)), containing information on how to proceed when a chassis is received, and transport
damage is found. Next, fill in the Transport Damage Report. Please note that these documents are
available only in English and Swedish.
The documents are available in chapter 14 Appendix in the BBM via SAIL.
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.6 Transport damage > General

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
17
1.7 Vehicle Optimiser

General
Vehicle Optimiser is a calculation program that is
continuously updated with information on all of
Scania chassis. The bus bodybuilder can obtain information on chassis weight and centre of gravity
from Vehicle Optimiser.
The bus bodybuilder can also complement the Scania information about the chassis with its own data
from finished bodywork. The Vehicle Optimiser
programme thus becomes an instrument for calculating the following properties of the completed
vehicle:
Load and passenger capacity.
Turning radiuses and accessibility.
Rollover threshold.
Vehicle Optimiser is on the SAIL portal at this address:
http://sail.scania.com
To access SAIL, consult Scania's local contact.
BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.7 Vehicle Optimiser > General

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
18
Preparations before bus bodybuilding
2.1 Type designations

Type designations
6. Type of transport
F 250
F HB
F 250 HB 4x2 HZ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
H - Short or long distances, irregular, paved or

unpaved surfaces with appropriate steering
and locomotion comfort.
7. Chassis adaptation
332979
A - For articulated buses.

B - Without special adaptation (normal).
1. Chassis model
2. Chassis type
3. Type designation
8. Wheel configuration
4x2 - 2-axle chassis with rear driving axle.
6x2 - 3-axle chassis with rear driving axle.
8x2 (F bi-articulated) - Chassis with 4 axles, 1
front steering axle, 1 rear drive axle and 2 support axles behind the driving axle.
9. Chassis height
H - High at the front and rear.
N - Normal front, middle and rear.
10. Suspension
A - Multi-leaf spring suspension at the front
and air suspension at the rear.
B - Front and rear air suspension, rigid front
axle.
Z - Multi-leaf spring suspension at the front
and rear.
4. Engine location
F - chassis with front engine positioned longitudinally.
5. Power code
Approx. value of net output in hp.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.1 Type designations > Type designations
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
20
2.2 Removing the chassis

Removing by lifting
IMPORTANT!
Make sure that no cables or pipes are damaged

when installing the hoisting cables.
Lifting with cables

Always attach the lifting cables to the wheels when
lifting the chassis at ports or other sites. Generally,
special lifting devices are available for this purpose. Pass the cables around the ends of the chassis
side members a few times to prevent the extra
weight at the front of the unit from tipping forward. Make sure that these cables are slack as they
are only designed to prevent the chassis from tipping forward.
Typical configuration of cables for lifting the chassis.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.2 Removing the chassis > Removing by lifting
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
21

Removing the chassis through driving
WARNING!
Exercise the greatest caution during all driving of

the chassis. From a safety and strength point of
view it is inadvisable to drive the chassis faster
than 30 km/h. Avoid driving on public roads.
There will be no braking effect in the chassis, if
there is no pressure in the brake system and if the
brake cylinder screws are loose.
If there is no hydraulic pressure, the power steering
will not be operational and the chassis will become
difficult to steer.
317 089
1. Parking brake interlock valve
Before discharging the chassis by steering it, you

must wait for the entire air system to be charged
with enough pressure to supply the entire brake
system. Some chassis are equipped with an interlock valve for the parking brake. If this button has
been activated, a button on the instrument panel
will have to be pressed so that the parking brake
can be released, see the figure above.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.2 Removing the chassis > Removing the chassis through driving
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
22
If the engine does not start for some reason, the

pneumatic system can be filled with air from another source of compressed air, with the exception
of oil and water, from a coupling union located at
the front of the chassis.
4x2 and 6x2 Chassis
8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis
If there is no hydraulic pressure the power steering

will not be operational and the chassis steering will
be heavy.
The front end of the chassis has a connection for
rapid filling of the entire pneumatic system. Its location may vary slightly. The connecting thread is
M14. Use anhydrous and oil-free air from an external compressed air source (max. 12 bar).
1. Joint for external air filling
351 343
332 140
1. Joint for external air filling

2. Filling nipples of the of the front suspension air bellows.
For more information about the suspension, see

Chapter 6.9 Suspension.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.2 Removing the chassis > Removing the chassis through driving
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
23
2.3 Towing the chassis

Action before towing
When towing less than 500 metres
When on tow for less than 500 metres no action is
required before towing.
When towing more than 500 metres
If the engine is working, no action need be taken
before towing except keeping the engine running
at idling speed.
Manual gearbox
If the bus or chassis with manual gearbox is to

be towed more than 500 metres, the input shaft
of the gearbox must rotate, i.e. the engine must
be running to ensure that the gearbox receives
sufficient lubrication.
If the engine cannot be run at idling speed then
the driving wheels must be lifted or both the
drive axles removed, see the section later on in
this chapter entitled, Removing the drive axles, or Removing the propeller shaft.
IMPORTANT!
The gearbox receives no lubrication when the vehicle is being towed because the oil pump on the
automatic gearbox, or the rotation of the input
shaft on the manual gearbox, requires the engine to
be running.
The half shafts should be fitted back in place by a
Scania workshop.
The propeller shaft should be fitted back in place
by a Scania workshop.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.3 Towing the chassis > Action before towing
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
24
IMPORTANT!
When the engine has been stopped the brake pressure will gradually drop. Steering will also be
heavy as there is no power steering.
When the parking brake has been rendered non-operational through release of the spring force in the
brake chamber, the vehicle will have no functioning brakes.
Braking capacity will be restored when the air
pressure in the brake system has been built up
again by the compressor.
In connection with all towing considerations it is

important to ensure that the parking brake is not
applied on the affected wheels.
The parking brake has a connection in the hand
brake valve on the instrument panel, like that of the
tyres. By connecting the parking brake circuit to
the spare wheel, for instance, the parking brake can
be temporarily released for a certain time. A hose
for this purpose is included in the chassis accessory box.
If no compressed air is available, unscrew the
screw in the spring brake cylinder.
320 720
Releasing the parking brake
Air connection for the parking brake circuit.
317 090
1. Release bolt for spring brake cylinder
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.3 Towing the chassis > Action before towing
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
25

Removing the half shafts
IMPORTANT!
The half shafts should be fitted back in place by a

Scania workshop.
317 086
317 082
Remove the half shafts on right-hand and left-hand

sides. If this is not done the rear axle gear could
sustain damage.
1.
Remove the nuts and cones. If the cones are

stuck, hit the flange corners until they come
free. Remove the flange from the half shaft.
2.
Withdraw and remove the half shaft.
3.
Refit the half shaft flange to keep dirt out.
4.
Repeat points 1-3 on the drive wheel on the

other side.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.3 Towing the chassis > Removing the half shafts
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
26

Detaching the propeller shaft
IMPORTANT!
The propeller shaft must be refitted by a Scania

workshop.
317 084
317 083
Remove the propeller shaft from the central gear's

side.
Remove the bearing retainer using two screwdrivers, which must be applied alternately on
both sides.
Hold the propeller shaft and remove the

screws. Fasten the bearing retainers together to
prevent them from falling off.
4.
Secure the propeller shaft to the chassis and

protect the axle with a plastic bag or similar.
317 085
2.
3.
1.
Undo the bolts but do not remove them.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.3 Towing the chassis > Detaching the propeller shaft
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
27

Towing via the front end
WARNING!
Care must be taken whenever the chassis is moved.

Driving on public highways must be avoided, because the chassis is not equipped with the appropriate safety components.
Towing the chassis on a level surface:
When the chassis is moved inside the bodybuilder's workshop, it must be pushed or pulled using a
towbar.
To allow the chassis to be towed, the bodybuilder
should fabricate a tow hitch (as shown in the figure
on the next page).
The same towing device must be used later for
towing the finished bus.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.3 Towing the chassis > Towing via the front end
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
28
The pin and hook must be supplied by the bodybuilder together with all the other tools on the finished bus.
The bracket must be welded onto the front frame of
the chassis, as shown in the figure, in the most suitable position.
The bodybuilder is responsible for designing and
fitting a suitably sized towing device to stand up to
the towing forces involved.
1
3
302 403
Valid only for F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis.

1. Pin
2. Hook
3. Bracket
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
29
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis is already provided with a tow point (1).
If the bodybuilder decides not to use the original
tow point, it is responsible for ensuring the design
and installation of suitable dimensions to withstand the forces involved in towing.
1
348 746
We recommend that the tow point is connected to

the side member.
Valid only for 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis.

1. Towing point
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
30
Towing the chassis by raising the front

axle
The chassis can also be towed and raised by connecting a lifting beam into the holes located on the
lower part of the front module, as shown in the figure.
1
1
302 404
Valid only for F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis.

1. The hole diameter is 33 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
31
2.4 Storing the chassis

Storing the chassis
WARNING!
The chassis has no service brake when the brake

system is depressurised. Attach a note to the steering wheel advising that the vehicle has no braking
power.
IMPORTANT!
Trickle-charge the batteries every third month.
Scania's chassis are transport-protected from the

factory. This means that the agent Tectyl 300 has
been applied to unpainted areas, for example,
tooled surfaces such as torque rod attachments.
This protection can take paint and must be maintained. Consequently it must not be removed before painting.
However, when storing under unfavourable conditions this treatment must be supplemented, e.g. if
the chassis shall be stored for more than 6 months,
see below.
Action plan
The following instructions can be applied to chassis storage over a period of several months up to a
couple of years. Complete conservation should be
applied in the case of lengthier storage.
Storing for 6 months

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Warm up the engine to at least 80 C.

Drain the compressed air tanks.
Replace the fuel filters.
Fill the fuel tanks, otherwise condensate is
formed in the tanks.
Remove the batteries or detach the batteries'
negative terminals. They must be fully
charged, min. 25.2 volts.
The storage location must be protected from
precipitation and sunlight.
Cover the tyres and light plastic components to
protect them from sunlight.
Lubricate the link yoke between the brake
slack adjuster and the brake chamber.
Make sure that the instrument panel, steering
wheel and the central electric unit are covered
with plastic covering or similar.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.4 Storing the chassis > Storing the chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
32
2.4 Storing the chassis
Storing for more than 6 months
Repeat every 3 months
1.
(Every 6 months if the chassis is stored in heated

and dry premises.)
Support the chassis with blocks between the

frame and axle beam.
2. Supplement the transport protection. Fine
spray or brush metal surfaces that are not
painted e.g. edges, corners and screw joints.
However, rims and wheel nuts must not be
treated with transport protection.
3. Unscrew the release bolts in the parking brake
cylinders.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Warm up the engine to at least 80 C.

Turn the front wheels to their end positions a
couple of times.
Depress the brake pedal several times.
Depress the clutch pedal several times.
Support the axles. Engage one gear at a time
and allow the timing gears to work for a while
when running to operating temperature.
Rotate the front and tag axle wheels.
Check all electrically controlled systems.
Investigate whether the chassis has been attacked by rust. Rectify it if this is the case.
Check oils, fluid levels and for any leaks.
Drain the air tanks.
Check the protection on the central electric
unit and instruments.
Check the batteries, min. 25.2 volts.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.4 Storing the chassis > Storing the chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
33
2.5 Handling the batteries

General
The following action must be taken in order that
the batteries do not sustain permanent damage during storage and bus bodybuilding:
When removing the batteries they must be marked
with the chassis numbers to ensure that they are
used on the correct chassis after bus bodybuilding.
The battery switch must always be switched off
when the chassis' engine is switched off and when
the chassis is stored.
Note:
Bus bodybuilders are responsible for the condition

of batteries for as long as a chassis is in their possession.
WARNING!
When the batteries are charged explosive gas is

formed.
Smoking is prohibited!
No naked flames or welding near the battery!
Wear protective goggles!
Battery acid is highly corrosive!
If acid gets into your eyes or onto your skin or
clothes, rinse them immediately with water.
Always seek medical attention if you get acid
in your eyes.
A short circuit can cause injuries and an outbreak of fire.
If the charging status falls below approx. 50%

(electrolyte specific gravity is below approx. 1.20
g/cm ) then the battery's lead plates start to sulphate.
The sulphating is permanent and diminishes the
battery service life and capacity (Ah). It will also
become more difficult to charge the battery which
can mean that in future it will be more difficult for
it to hold a charging status above approx. 50% and
prevent further sulphating.
Removing and fitting batteries, see chapter 2.7 Removing battery equipment.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.5 Handling the batteries > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
34
The chassis batteries can be supplied to the bus

bodybuilder with a charging status of 1.26 g/cm
without the batteries being damaged or reducing
their service life. This takes place if the charging
status is below 1.20 g/cm.
When the bus bodybuilder receives the chassis, the
charging status of the batteries must be checked
immediately and they must be charged if necessary.
WARNING!
The battery contains corrosive acid which requires

that work is conducted with caution and the use of
safety equipment.
Checking battery charging status

Measure battery charging status by measuring battery acid density, also known as acid gravity. Do
this using a hydrometer or measuring tool with a
prism. The battery must have been at rest for at
least 10 hours when the acid gravity is measured.
Note:
Acid gravity measurement cannot be performed if

the battery has recently been topped up with distilled water. It takes an extremely long time (several days) for the water and acid to mix.
Switch off electrical components when checking
the battery's state of charge. The batteries do not
need to be disconnected.
The voltage can be measured directly at the terminals or between the positive cable and ground connection in the safety panel in the driver area (the
battery box need not be opened). For values, see
the table on the next page. Compensation for ambient temperatures is unnecessary.
Charging batteries.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
35
Note:
Note:
Measure the acid gravity in all cells in both batteries. If the difference in acid gravity between the
cell with the highest value and that with the lowest
value exceeds 0.03 kg/dm then the cells are damaged. Both batteries must be removed and replaced
with new ones.
Check the state of charge at least once a week.
If measuring the acid gravity has to be carried out

at temperatures around -10 C and less, remember
that the meter will show a slightly higher value
compared with the table below.
Replace the battery if the acid density is lower than
1.24 g/cm. If the bus is equipped with a charging
socket, this must be used. Check that the battery
master switch is turned off.
A discharged battery freezes at -5 C.
On delivery to the end customer the bus must have

a state of charge of 1.24 g/cm or higher.
As a maintenance measure, trickle-charge the batteries during bus bodybuilding. Do not use boost
charging.
If boost charging has to be used in an emergency,
battery temperature should not exceed approx. +50
C. Stop the charging if severe battery gassing occurs.
Before delivery to dealer or end customer:
check the battery electrolyte level
make sure that the battery state of charge is

1.26 g/cm (approx. 100%).
Before delivery to the dealer or customer the bus
bodybuilder must check the battery electrolyte level and make sure that the battery state of charge is
1.26 g/cm (approx. 100%).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
36

Checking battery electrolyte level
Open the battery cell cover. Check that the fluid is
level with the marking that is visible in the battery
cell.
If the level is too low, fill with distilled water (battery water) up to the correct level.
Note:
Sulphuric acid or so-called improvement electrolyte must not be used.

Disconnect the negative terminal or the battery
master switch before starting to charge the batteries. This does not apply to trickle charging or when
using a charging socket.
Marking the batteries

Code for production month for selected make:
Noak: three digits

Example: 244 = week 24 year 2004
Centurion: four digits

Example: 2204 = week 22 year 2004
Tudor: three digits

Example: 422 = year 2004 week 22
Acid gravity (kg/
dm)
Charging status (%)
Terminal voltage (V)
Recommended
action
More than 1.26

1.26-1.20
Less than 1.20
100-85
85-50
50-0
More than 12.6

12.6-12.2
Less than 12.2
Battery OK
Charge the battery
Replace the battery
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.5 Handling the batteries > Checking battery electrolyte level
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
37
2.6 Protection before bus bodybuilding

Chassis protection
WARNING!
The hydraulic oil tanks for the servo systems

(clutch and steering) must be protected while
bodybuilding is in progress due to the risk of fire.
Protection of chassis components

The bodybuilder must protect the chassis components in the time of preparing the chassis and keep
the protections during the bus bodybuilding process.
Articulation - The angle sensor unit (1) must

be protected by a plate.
Important components that must be protected during bus bodybuilding:
Grounding off, drilling, painting and welding work

can damage unprotected chassis components.
The bodybuilder should protect the radiator with a
hard plate when bodybuilding is in progress.
When working on the upper part of the chassis,
note that there are fragile components that must
not be trodden on.
transmission belts and pulleys.

Powertrain electrical components (ECU, cable
harnesses, sensors, connectors, etc.).
chassis cable harness, pneumatic and hydraulic pipes.
Expansion tank - protect the tank before and
during bus bodybuilding. If the expansion tank
is exposed to UV light it will become discoloured and the level in the tank will then be
hard to read.
Radiators -protect the front part of the radiator
against impact, with a hard plate.
Steering wheel.
Multi-leaf springs - cannot be exposed to
welding sparks, protect with fire-proof/thermal insulating material.
Pneumatic valves and silencers.
All plastic components.
1
349 812
IMPORTANT!
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.6 Protection before bus bodybuilding > Chassis protection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
38
2.6 Protection before bus bodybuilding
Protection of chassis electrical

components
Removing protection
Disassembled components
The chassis should be protected during the entire

welding and painting process, whenever it is being
built on.
Note:
Note:
All protections added to the chassis must be maintained as far as possible until the end of the bodybuilding process and then removed.
All disassembled components must be identified

with the chassis number and stored in an appropriate manner in boxes or on shelves. These components must be protected against dirt, dust, heat,
sunlight, moisture, physical damage and scratches.
Electrical harnesses, connectors and sensors, in

particular, must be protected against physical damage, weld splatters, dirt and moisture during bodybuilding.
Note:
Do NOT use the components of one chassis on another chassis.

Note:
When working on the upper part of the chassis,

note that there are fragile components that must
not be trodden on.
Note:
When removing cables and their clamps, do not

use a knife, as you can easily damage cables or
plastic manifolds. Instead, use cutting pliers and
take care nonetheless.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.6 Protection before bus bodybuilding > Chassis protection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
39
2.7 Preparatory electrical work

General
REQUIREMENT!
Do not disconnect the battery cables whilst the engine is running. This could seriously damage the
alternator, the electronic control units and other
electrical equipment.
All electric components are unique to the chassis.
For this reason, mark the electric components with
the chassis serial number while bus bodybuilding
is in progress.
A unique component code
To avoid incorrect connection, the connectors, etc.
are marked with a unique component code, e.g.
"C123".
REQUIREMENT!
Protect all components that are removed from the

chassis during bus bodybuilding against physical
damage and weld spatter. Carefully store the components in special boxes, wrapped in a leather
blanket.
Before the start of bus bodybuilding the electrical
system should be prepared in accordance with the
following six sections:
Removing the battery and associated equipment.

Removing the electrical panel.
Removing the instrument panel.
Removing the steering wheel.
Cable harness location.
All connectors, etc. are marked with a unique component code.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
40

Removing the batteries
REQUIREMENT!
Mark the batteries and associated equipment with

the chassis serial number.
Remove the batteries in accordance with the following instructions.

1.
Mark the battery with the chassis number.

2. Disconnect the power supply from the chassis.
Disconnect the battery cables from the terminals. Start with the ground wire (negative
pole), (1). Continue with the other battery cables (2).
IMPORTANT!
Do not disconnect the battery cables whilst the engine is running. The alternator, the electronic control units and other electrical equipment could be
severely damaged.
3.
Disconnect the thick cable from the starter motor (3). The starter cable runs from the battery
master switch to the starter motor via the junction box. The junction box is located beside
the engine.
Batteries, battery master switch and 2 main fuses

(1x100 A + 1x30 A) are stored in a wooden box on
the chassis frame during transport. In transit mode
the battery master switch receives its control signal
via the starter key.
When removing the batteries disconnect the electrical

cables in the following order: 1, 2, 3.
1. Ground wire
2. Other electrical wires
3. Starter cable
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > Removing the batteries
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
41
4.
Remove the electrical panel's power supply by

loosening the electrical cables between the
battery box and the electrical panel. Loosen
the electrical panel wires labeled 1, 2, 3, 4 and
5 in the figure below.
5.
Note:
Use the hexagonal socket tool, as shown below, to

remove the nuts (1), (3) and (4) of the electrical
panel in order to prevent the plastic coating of the
same being damaged.
Detach the cable harnesses on the frame which

are routed between the battery box and the
electrical panel. Also disconnect the battery
from its temporary ground point (1).
1
2
3
4
1. Voltage supply 30
344 063
344 055
1
For nuts (3) and (4) use a 13 mm bracket, and for nut
(1) use a 17 mm socket.
2. Ground
3. Voltage feed B+
4. CUV F565 power supply
339 619
5. Connector C610
1. Temporary ground point

6.
Lift out the battery box and the cable harness.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > Removing the batteries
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
42

Removing the electrical panel
4.
REQUIREMENT!
Mark the electrical panel with the chassis serial

number.
Remove the transport connection between the

C600 connectors.
1.
2.
Check that the electrical panel's power supply

is removed.
3. Remove all the cables from the electrical panel
and the transport cable.
325 718
When the electrical panel of the chassis is removed, mark the electrical panel with the
chassis serial number.
317 092
REQUIREMENT!
Remove the transport connection between the

C600 connectors and discard it.
The transport connection is marked with a label,
see figure below. Plug connector C600 and adapter
C600 directly into each other.
317 091
1. Transport connection
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > Removing the electrical panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
43
During chassis transport, the tachograph is fitted to

a support at the back of the electrical panel. Mark
the tachograph with the chassis serial number.
REQUIREMENT!
Mark the tachograph with the chassis number.
5.
The electrical panel and tachograph are now electrically disconnected and can be removed from the
chassis.
Remove the provisional transport bracket from

the tachograph. Do not use the transport bracket as a permanent component of the bus.
Position the tachograph by the instrument panel.
323 819
For further information on the final installation of

the tachograph, see chapter 9.6. Tachograph.
Remove the electrical panel from the chassis.
317 094
6.
1. Tachograph
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > Removing the electrical panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
44

Removing the instrument panel
Depending on the chassis specification, it can be
provided with a pressure sensor and optional temperature sensor. Pressure sensors and temperature
sensors are located under the floor in the driver area.
Follow the instructions below to remove the panel:

1.
Remove the temporary clamp.
5.
Store the cable harness with the other components of the instrument panel. Now the instrument panel is electrically disconnected.
Remove the instrument panel from the chassis.
6.
Scania recommends that COO coordinator and

instrument panel are removed simultaneously,
as the coordinator and cable harness are sensitive to dirt and weld spatter.
346 135
Check that the electrical cables of the electrical panel are disconnected.
2. Remove the power cable from the parking
brake pressure sensor T501 (1).
3. Remove the power cable from the external
temperature sensor T27 (2).
4.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > Removing the instrument panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
45

Cable harness positioning.
Positioning the cable harness during
bodybuilding - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
1.
Check that the electrical panel is electrically

disconnected from the chassis.
2. The cable harness is provisionally fixed with
clamps on the chassis frame. Attachments with
clamps marked in figure (A), are not provisional and should not be removed.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the power unit
and articulation. Remove the plastic clamps
that hold the cable harness in the provisional
region (B).
4. Place the cable harness between the wheels
and protect them during the welding process.
349 825
A
A. Cable harness permanently attached with clamps
B. Provisionally attached cable harness
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > Cable harness positioning.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
46

Removing the steering wheel
Note:
Scania recommends that the steering wheel remain

in place during the bodybuilding, protected in a
suitable way.
For more information about removing the steering
wheel, see chapter 7.1 Steering.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.7 Preparatory electrical work > Removing the steering wheel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
47
2.8 Removing the temporary driver area

Fixed instrument panel
The instrument panel can be used as a permanent
component of the bodywork panel.
The instrument panel's support frame is only intended for use during the transport of the chassis to
the bus bodybuilder.
The instrument panel is not located in the correct
ergonomic position.
For further information, see chapter 9.2 Ergonomics.
320 721
REQUIREMENT!
Discard the support frame. The support frame is

designed for use during chassis transit.
Fixed instrument panel.
1. Instrument panel
2. Support frame
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.8 Removing the temporary driver area > Fixed instrument panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
48
2.9 Accessory box

General
Note:
339 615
An accessory box is supplied together with the

chassis upon delivery.
Accessory box dimensions (1,030 x 330 x 250 mm).
Amongst other components, the accessory box

contains the type plate and Scania's logotype
plates, see chapter 3.1 Information about the chassis and chapter 12.1 Plates.
Before the bus bodybuilding is started the bus
bodybuilder must go through the boxes' contents
and check them off against an accessory list that is
included with the chassis. If any part is missing,
contact your nearest service centre and indicate the
chassis number and the missing item.
Note:
For further information on the chassis specification, see SPII (Web CHIN via SAIL.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.9 Accessory box > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
49
2.9 Accessory box

Driver's manual and Quick guide
The Driver's manual is adapted to the specific
chassis' equipment. It is therefore important that
the bus bodybuilder makes sure that Driver's manual is included with the finished bus delivered to
the end customer.
XXXXXXX
English
This Quick guide is a shortened version of the

Driver's manual. The Quick guide is not adapted to
the chassis.
R eading instructions on the back
The Driver's manual and Quick guide are supplied

in the accompanying materials box.
IMPORTANT!
Driver's manual.
322 488
322 498
If the Driver's manual is missing, order a new one

from Scania.
Quick guide.
1. Language
2. Chassis serial number
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.9 Accessory box > Driver's manual and Quick guide
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
50
2.10 Special tools

Special tools
Tools for filling and draining coolant
302 068
Special tools are designed to make work on the

chassis easier. The special tools can be ordered
from your nearest distributor.
Coolant tank 588135.
Coolant tank 588135 is designed to be used for

drainage, transport, storage, filtering, emptying
and topping up of the vehicle.
Adapter 99301.
Adapter 99301 is used for draining and filling

coolant. It is used together with coolant tank
588135.
To operate these tools, see 5.6 Cooling system.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.10 Special tools > Special tools
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
51
2.11 Articulated bus

Supply of 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis is supplied with
the following length:
8
A. 17,500 mm
Note:
The articulation platform is not provided by Scania.
358 915
8
-8
341 787
-8
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis allows an incline

angle of 8 in the articulation unit.
Depending on the type of body, the angle can be
smaller. If the articulation unit incline is too great,
you may risk severe damage to the articulation
units in the chassis.
BBM F > 2 Preparations before bus bodybuilding > 2.11 Articulated bus > Supply of 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
52
Body connection
3.1 Chassis information

Chassis drawings
Main dimension drawings
Floor height limitation drawings
The main dimensions of the bus chassis are the

measurements of the main parts of the chassis for
the bus bodybuilder, e.g. pilot holes, inspection
hatches and attachments.
The objective of the floor height limitation drawings is to show a detailed technical description of
the limitations between chassis and bodywork.
The chassis module is divided into front, central

and rear modules.
The main dimension drawings are divided according to the characteristics such as the chassis type
designation, overhangs and engine location.
The main dimension drawings also include floor
limitations as well as information about maintenance and accessibility.
IMPORTANT!
No part of the bodywork must be placed under the

floor limitation.
There are also drawings showing the service areas

for chassis components. The service area is defined by a service space and a space for access.
These spaces are defined as three-dimensional volumes and show the minimum volume required to
perform the maintenance of chassis components.
For more information, see Chapter 10.1 Service areas, accessibility and hatches.
For more information about the floor, see chapter

4.1 Floor.
To obtain chassis drawings, refer to the BBM via

SAIL.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.1 Chassis information > Chassis drawings
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
54

Chassis serial number marking
Chassis serial number
The chassis number (last 7 numerals) is part of the
Vehicle Identification Number, VIN. The embossed chassis number must not be concealed or
covered with paint or corrosion inhibitor.
The chassis number is stamped on the side member

of the chassis. The chassis number location is the
same for all types of F chassis.
333 000
9BSF4X200D3818299
333 001
A. Chassis number
REQUIREMENT!
The embossed chassis number must be readable.
Chassis number location.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.1 Chassis information > Chassis serial number marking
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
55

Reference marks on the chassis.
The reference marks, represented by triangles
stamped on the upper flange of the side members,
indicate the theoretical centre line of the front axle
and chassis traction, and can orientate the bodybuilder on the bus bodybuilding process.
Note:
Due to the movement of the axles according to the

chassis load, there might be a misalignment between the reference mark and the centre of the axles. For information on axle movement, see
chapter 12.2 Wheels.
CL
CL
CL
337 730
CL
A. Front Overhang
B. Wheelbase
C. Rear Overhang
CL. Centre line of the axles
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.1 Chassis information > Reference marks on the chassis.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
56

Chassis type plate
An aluminium chassis type plate is supplied in the
chassis accessory box.
REQUIREMENT!
Put the chassis type plate in a visible place, near

the front passenger door.
Some information on the chassis type plate is preentered by Scania on delivery of the chassis, and
some information may be entered by the bodybuilder or distributor before vehicle delivery to the
customer.
Implement the text inscription on the chassis type

plate in a permanent manner, as not to fade over
time.
The height of the characters should be at least 4
mm, in accordance with the ISO 4 030 standard,
except for the load and speed index fields.
Numbers or letters should have uniform and complete outlines, with good readability, using a Roman, sans-serif font in accordance with the ISO 3
779 standard.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.1 Chassis information > Chassis type plate
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
57
Field 17: Scania specifies the technically allowed

weight in an axle group.
(2)
VIN
YS2K6X20091865123
(3) Regist. for

(4) Total
Body type
(18)
Se r ial No
(19)
Ch No
(20)
1865123
Kg
Ch type
(21)
K 420 EB6x2*4
Tyre load/speed index (22)
Technically
per missi ble
(SE)
Kg
(11)
25000
(5) Combination
(6) Axle 1-
Kg
(12)
Kg
Kg
(13)
7500
Kg
(7) Axle 2-
Kg
(14)
11500
Kg
(8) Axle 3-
Kg
(15)
6000
Kg
(9) Axle 4-
Kg
(16)
Kg
Kg
(17)
17500
Kg
(10) Axle group T-
Field 18: Enter the vehicle body type.

Field 19: Enter the body serial number.
152/148M (7100/12600kg 130 km/h)
Pressure
(23)
ACCORDING TO TYRE MARKING
Load max front axle
(24)
7100
(25)
S weden
Field 20: Scania specifies the chassis serial number.

Kg
(de p. on speed limit setting)
Produced in
The chassis type plate above is applied on buses

used in markets that are in compliance with EU
regulation 19/2011.
Field 1: EG or national certification number. This
information is mandatory for vehicles with complete vehicle certification, in compliance with the
2007/46/EC standard.
336 957
(1)
correspond to ISO norm 3166-1: 2006 and between brackets, see the example.
Fields 4-10: Specify the maximum weights allowed to register the vehicle. These weights should
not exceed those listed in the "Technically allowed" column
Field 2: Scania specifies the Vehicle Identification

Number, VIN.
Field 11: Scania specifies the technically allowed

gross weight of the vehicle. The total weight is less
than or equal to the sum of all allowed weights per
axle of the vehicle.
Field 3: When fields 4 to 10 are pre-entered during

registration/preparation, it is necessary to enter the
country code where the vehicle will be registered
in field 3. The code should consist of 2 letters corresponding to ISO norm 3166-1: 2006 and
Fields 13-16: Scania specifies the technically allowed weights for each respective axle, according
to the vehicle project.
Field 21: Scania specifies the chassis type designation.

Field 22: Load and speed indices of the tyres. Scania provides the data according to the order specification.
Field 23: Scania specifies the maximum tyre pressure.
Field 24: maximum weight of the front axle. The
given information specifies the charging capacity
of the front axle in accordance with the tyre load
index. Scania provides the data according to the
tyre type and maximum speed information in the
order specification.
Field 25: Scania specifies the country of manufacture.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
58
(1)
G. V. W
P. B. T
P. B. T
(2)
Axle 1
Eje 1
Eixo 1
(3)
Axle 2
Eje 2
Eixo 2
(4)
K 420 EB6X2NI
Axle 3
Eje 3
Eixo 3
1865123
Axle 4
Eje 4
Eixo 4
(5)
YS2K6X20091865123
Ch type
Ch tipo
Ch tipo
Ch No.
Ch Num
Ch Num
Technical/Tecnico/Tecnico
kg
G. V. W
P. B. T (11)
P. B. T
(7)
kg
Axle 1
Eje 1
Eixo 1
(8)
kg
(6)
(9)
(10)
Tyre load/speed Index

Llanta Codigo de Carga/
Velocidad
Pneu Indice de Carga/
Velocidade
25000
kg
(12)
7500
kg
Axle 2
Eje 2
Eixo 2
Pressure
Presion
Pressao
(13)
11500
kg
kg
Axle 3
Eje 3
Eixo 3
(14)
6000
kg
kg
Axle 4
Eje 4
Eixo 4
(15)
kg
Fr Axle Load max

Eje Delant Carga max
Eixo Diant Peso max
G. C. W
C. M. T
C. M. T
G. C. W
P. B. T. C
P. B. T. C
(16) 152/148M
7100/12600kg
130 km/h
(17) ACCORDING TO TYRE MARKING
(18)
7100
kg
(19)
kg
(20)
kg
The chassis type plate above is used if the vehicle

is driven in a market conforming to the Brazilian
CONTRAN resolution no. 49.
Field 3: Enter any local marking.
Among other things, the chassis type plate is used

in markets where there is a condition for the text on
the chassis type plate to be both in Spanish and
English, for example Mexico.
Field 5: Chassis serial number.
Field 1: National certification number.
Field 16: Load and speed indices of the tyres. Scania provides the data according to the order specification.
VEA GRABACION EN LA LLANTA

VEJA GRAVACAO NO PNEU
321 343
Legal/Legal/Legal
Field 11: Total vehicle weight. The technically allowed weight is less than or equal to the sum of all
weights per axle.
Field 4: Chassis type designation.
Fields 6-10: Legally allowed vehicle weights.

Field 6: The total weight is less than or equal to the
sum of all allowed weights per axle of the vehicle.
Field 2: Vehicle Identification Number, VIN.
Field 17: Maximum tyre pressure.

Field 18: Max. front axle weight. The given information specifies the charging capacity of the front
axle in accordance with the tyre load index. Scania
provides the data according to the tyre type and
maximum speed information in the order specification.
Field 19: Only for the Brazilian market, the same
value is entered as in field 11. For other markets,
the field is pre-entered with (X).
Field 20: Only for the Brazilian market, the same
value is entered as in field 6. For other markets, the
field is pre-entered with (X).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
59
Supplementary plate for chassis delivered to Arabic countries.

SCANIA SWEDEN
COUNTRY OF PRODUCTION:
VIN:
YEAR:
Type approval marking

If the vehicle is not covered by WVTA (Whole Vehicle Type Approval), a sticker with the type approval is supplied in the accompanying materials
box.
GVW KG:
Supplementary plate for chassis for South and

Central America.
If the completed vehicle is delivered to a country

not covered by WVTA, the following procedures
apply: Place the type approval sticker in a clearly
visible place on the inside, next to the front passenger door.
332 107
REQUIREMENT!
320 581
GAW KG:
FRONT:
REAR:
Example of type approval sticker.
311 161
SCANIA L ATIN AMERICA LT DA

A v. Jose Odo r izzi, 151
Sao Be r nardo do Campo - SP
CNPJ : 59 . 104 . 901/0001 - 76
INDUSTRIA BRASILEIRA
The sticker is self-adhesive. If the surface is not

suitable for a self-adhesive sticker, the sticker must
be placed on an aluminium plate to be attached on
the surface by means of screws or rivets.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
60
Features of the metal suspension (multileaf spring)

The metal suspension is characterized by the deflection that varies with the load that is placed on
it.
So that the bus remains level after bodybuilding,

there needs to be a balance in the distribution of
body load.
362 761
There is a load difference on the front axle due to

the positioning of the chassis components, valid
for LHD/RHD (the driver's position, steering box,
air filter assembly, etc.), which can cause transversal tilt in the chassis.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
61
3.2 Chassis levelling

General
Scania recommends that the bodybuilder fits the
body structure on to the chassis using brackets or
stands that ensure that the bodywork is correctly
aligned and levelled with the chassis.
REQUIREMENT!
The chassis must be levelled with the support or

blocks when the body is coupled.
Modules must be joined within the tolerance specified by Scania ( 1 mm).

WARNING!
The chassis must be supported on blocks before

separating the front and rear modules for installing
the central module of the body.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.2 Chassis levelling > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
62

Positioning of support brackets or blocks for chassis levelling
The supports or blocks for holding the chassis
frame must be placed on the support points in the
chassis frame, as shown in the figure below.
Make sure that they are located before and after the
spring supports.
Chassis levelled for bodybuilding.
Use adjustable stands during the chassis alignment

through measurement.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.2 Chassis levelling > Positioning of support brackets or blocks for chassis levelling
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
63
Separation of the chassis for installation

of extension structures - 8x2 (F biarticulated)
WARNING!
For chassis with articulation, these supports must

be correctly positioned before the modules are separated.
1.
349 819
Position the central module so that, there is

8.30 metres in relation to the front module and
wheelbase.
2. Position the rear module so that, there is 6.70
metres in relation to the central module and
wheelbase.
3. Adjust and check with a level gauge that the
modules are aligned horizontally.
4. Stretch a string or laser parallel to the chassis
and measure with a tape measure to check the
longitudinal alignment, respecting the tolerances indicated by Scania.
Chassis levelled for bodybuilding.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.2 Chassis levelling > Positioning of support brackets or blocks for chassis levelling
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
64

Levelling of chassis through measurement
Checking the horizontal plane of the
chassis
Remove as much weight as possible from the chassis frame on the wheels. The wheels can remain
supported on the floor. Keep the tyres supported on
the floor, supporting only the weight of the axles as
not to damage the shock absorbers.
A, B, C and D are measurement points for the F 4x2 and

6x2 chassis. The measuring point tolerance limit is up
to the cord length or by laser beam (1) 1 mm.
1
A
F
346 165
For more information about positioning of the

measuring point, see the figures for the chassis
type in question. To obtain information about Z0,
consult the appropriate main dimension drawing.
332 998
Make sure that the chassis frame is perfectly levelled when joining the body structure to the chassis.
A, B, C, D, E and F are measuring points for the 8x2 (F

bi-articulated) chassis. The measurement points tolerance limit for the cord or laser check (1) is 1 mm, and
the points A and B, 57 mm higher than the C, D, E and
F points
Spirit levels to check the horizontal plane of the chassis
frame.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.2 Chassis levelling > Levelling of chassis through measurement
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
65
Longitudinal alignment
Remove as much weight as possible from the chassis frame on the wheels. The wheels can remain
supported on the floor. Keep the tyres supported on
the floor, supporting only the weight of the axles as
not to damage the shock absorbers.
Example of longitudinal alignment in the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis.
For more information about positioning of the

measuring point, see the figures for the chassis
type in question. To obtain information about Z0,
consult the appropriate main dimensions drawing.
A, B, C, D, E, F and G are measurement points. The

measurement points tolerance limit for the cord or laser check (1) is 1 mm, and points A and B, being 62.5
mm higher than points C, D, E, F and G in relation to
the cord or laser reference at the side of the chassis.
349 820
Make sure that the chassis frame and modules are

perfectly levelled when joining the body structure
to the chassis.
Note:
The joints should also be aligned with respect to

the chassis.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
66
Checking the height by levelling - 8x2 (F

bi-articulated)
All chassis modules must be at the same height
(flat). The front, central and rear module must be
aligned laterally.
349 821
This is a condition so that the definitions of the different heights of the air chambers tubes of the
pneumatic spring air suspension and front axle angles are correct.
Check the height of the modules with water level.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
67
3.3 Forces affecting the bus

General
Project the bus bodywork so that it supports all the
dynamic forces that arise during a displacement
The most important function of the chassis frame
is to act as a bracket for all the components and
provide correct positions for them.
In designing a bus body, it is important to understand that it must be capable of withstanding the
dynamic forces that arise while the bus is in use.
The body together with the chassis frame make up
a unique product.
The frame is sufficiently rigid to ensure that the

wheel axles follow their calculated tracks during
suspension movements in combination with acceleration, braking, steering and sideways rolling.
Dynamic forces
The bus body must withstand a combination of dynamic forces in all directions. The forces act in
three main directions:
1.
Vertically, Fz in the figure

2. Longitudinally, Fx in the figure
3. Transversally, Fy in the figure
IMPORTANT!
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for the body

structure. Modifications to the chassis are not allowed.
For further information, see chapter 1.3 Chassis

modification.
Fy
Fz
Chassis frame F is built with two longitudinal Usection side members with transverse cross members between the side members.
332 996
If it is necessary to alter the original plan for the

chassis, the bodybuilder must request prior written
authorisation from Scania.
Fx
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.3 Forces affecting the bus > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
68

Vertical forces
General
Vertical forces are caused by acceleration of suspension movements and the static body, passenger
and luggage load. When the bus turns, vertical
forces affect the sides and the extension of the bus.
The vertical forces of the wheels are transferred to

the side members and then to the cross members
ahead of and behind the axles.
Project the diagonal profiles so that the load is

transferred to the chassis. See figure.
The diagonal profiles should be found where the
forces enter the side of the bodywork. This happens, for example, in the reinforcement ribbing
around the windows and cross members transferring the load to the chassis.
The reactions in the axles are split between the

bearing shells of the leaf springs. There are two
bearing shells for each leaf spring.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.3 Forces affecting the bus > Vertical forces
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
69
The bus powertrain (engine and gearbox), form a

concentrated mass that weighs about 1500 kg and
creates vertical dynamic forces. Most of these
forces travel through the front member/chassis
driver bracket to the body sides, from there forwards to the body structure and then down to the
spring beams of the front suspension.
Under severe driving conditions, such as when the

bus is driven on a very bad road, twisting of the bus
body can occur when the front wheel on one side
and the rear wheels on the opposite side are simultaneously pressed against the suspension stop.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
70
Side structures
In a lashing without diagonal profiles and "triangular panels", the spinning forces that pass through
the side structure create a large pressure on the
cross members. See figure below.
The sides of the bodywork form a resistant unit

when made in a frame with diagonal profile to give
an impression of "triangular panels" in the side
structure.
313 816
1. Diagonal profile
313 817
313 815
This lowers the forces on the chassis.
Large pressure on the cross members.
2. The profiles create the impression of a triangle in the

side structure
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
71
Longitudinal forces are transferred in the

floor frame
Longitudinal forces arise during acceleration or
braking of the mass (passengers, luggage and bus
components), for example when driving over obstacles.
333 006
Longitudinal forces
The floor structures for the passenger and luggage

areas, together with the chassis side members, constitute the most important parts for the transfer of
longitudinal forces.
Longitudinal forces are transferred from the wheel

axles to the chassis side members, through the suspension system.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.3 Forces affecting the bus > Longitudinal forces
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
72

Lateral forces
Lateral forces are transferred in the floor
frame
333 007
Lateral forces occur during the modification of the

driving system, cornering and if there is a wheel
trim or other obstacle on the road. Lateral forces
are transferred from the wheel axles to the chassis
frame structure through the suspension system.
332 994
The floor structures for the passenger and luggage

areas constitute the most important parts for the
transfer of lateral forces.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.3 Forces affecting the bus > Lateral forces
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
73
3.4 Welding
Safety and protection
Isocyanates are found in many paints, fillers, glues
and foam plastics that are used on motor vehicles.
WARNING!
Breathing in isocyanate in the form of fumes, dust

or aerosol can, among other things, cause irritation
of the mucous membrane, with symptoms similar
to those of asthma in the respiratory tract and impaired lung capacity. Even exposure to high doses
for a short time can lead to problems of permanent
over-sensitivity.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Scania's objective is to avoid paints, fillers and adhesives containing isocyanate, but they occur in
particular in some of the paint systems currently
used on vehicles when delivered from the factory.
Scania cannot vouch for paintwork, etc. performed
on the vehicle after delivery from the factory.
IMPORTANT!
All surfaces which heat up and can exceed about

150 C must be clean. The paint of the surfaces
must be removed before welding
Heating products containing compounds with isocyanate may release them and cause high levels of
exposure. This is what happens, for instance, during grinding, welding and heat cutting on products
coated with paints containing isocyanate.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Safety and protection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
74
3.4 Welding
Preparations prior to welding
WARNING!
All national safety regulations must be applied.

Use protection in the form of welding mask and
breathing mask with fresh-air supply during welding. The ventilation in the work premises must be
very good.
REQUIREMENT!
REQUIREMENT!
Switch off the chassis electrical system prior to

welding work.
Protect the following components during welding

work:
Disconnect the alternator cables and starter motor

cables.
The battery terminals must be disconnected before

any welding operation.
IMPORTANT!
In connection with welding, there is a high risk of

fire, and that plastic or other heat-sensitive material melts.
Welding sparks can easily cause fire or damage in

noise insulation, cable harnesses and brake cables.
304 972
Steering wheel;
Steering column;
Leaf springs;
Expansion tank;
Plastic air tubes;
Hoses;
Air and water radiators;
Air filter, etc.
Suspension level sensors;
Solenoid valves;
Pressure switch sensors, etc.
Protect glass parts so that they cannot be damaged.

Alternator.
Disconnection of the alternator eliminates the risk

of damage to the alternator's rectifier diodes and
charge regulator.
REQUIREMENT!
When welding near the electric wiring and plastic

compressed air lines, these must be protected
against sparks and high temperatures with fireproof blankets.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Preparations prior to welding
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
75
3.4 Welding
REQUIREMENT!
REQUIREMENT!
The entire powertrain (engine and gearbox) and

the expansion tank must be protected against welding sparks and high temperatures with fire-proof
blankets.
The multi-leaf springs must be protected during welding.
304 974
electric cables
air bellows
compressed air pipes
expansion tank.
322 224
Protect the following components against welding

sparks and high temperatures using fire-proof
blankets or similar:
304 973
Protection round the electric wiring.
Protection around air chambers.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Preparations prior to welding
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
76
3.4 Welding
Instructions
Note:
IMPORTANT!
Weld on the chassis with great accuracy. Cracks

and brittleness in the material reduce the strength
of the frame.
Welding creates thermal stress which affects the

strength of the material. The material properties of
frames deteriorate if the frame members are heated
above 650 C.
IMPORTANT!
Option 2 - If it is not possible to use option 1, it is

allowed to connect the body structure on the upper
flange of the side member.
Connect the negative lead (1) of the welding appliance as close to the weld as possible. If the welding
current passes through the rolling bearings, it will
damage them.
IMPORTANT!
Option 1 - Connect the side body parts to the side

member of the chassis.
To weld a side member U-beam flange

Weld at least 15 mm (A) from the outer edge
of the flange
Use reinforcement plates (1).
313 747
313 185
315 747
Welding on a U-beam flange.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Instructions

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
77
3.4 Welding
IMPORTANT!
REQUIREMENT!
Scania recommends that the bracket between the

extension and the pillar of the body is not welded
with longitudinal welds, see (1) in the figure below. The bodywork pillar can then be loosened in
the welding area.
The edge of the side member (A) must not be

welded.
15 mm from edge (A).
313 748
322 489
For more information on welding, see Chapter

3.10 Extension.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
78
3.4 Welding
REQUIREMENT!
Always weld at least:

1.
15 mm from edge (A).

2. 25 mm holes (B).
316 228
Beam with holes.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
79
3.4 Welding
Touch-up painting after welding
1.
Check the weld joints carefully. The welding

points must be of high quality.
2. Grind or brush off weld splatter and welding
oxides.
3. Paint the joints with anti-corrosion paint.
REQUIREMENT!
Paint all the welding points after welding.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Touch-up painting after welding
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
80
3.4 Welding
Alternative welding process (less aggressive) - Polyfusion welding
If polyfusion welding process is chosen, welding
must be done at least 15 mm from the outer edge
of the flange. Polyfusion welding is also recommended for welding side member components in U
made from metal plates.
Example of polyfusion welding.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Alternative welding process (less aggressive) - Polyfusion welding
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
81
3.4 Welding
X joints are recommended for the chassis side

members.
Grind or brush off weld splatters and oxides with a
steel brush before painting.
The V joints must be well filled on the outside and

surface ground off. The root side must be postwelded.
Check the joints carefully and make sure there are
no signs of cracks.
Grind or brush off weld splatters and oxides with a
steel brush before painting.
Paint the joints with anti-corrosion paint.
Example of an X-joint.
The weld bed (B) is ground off.
Welding can be done as an X joint or V joint.

X joints must be well filled immediately outside
the joint edges on the side member surfaces and the
surface must be ground off.
Example of a V joint.
The weld bed (B) is ground off.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Alternative welding process (less aggressive) - Polyfusion welding
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
82
3.4 Welding
Hole filling
If existing holes are to be filled, follow the instructions below.
A. Smooth off before making a new hole.

B. Remove the copper plate before making a new
hole.
1.
Bevel the hole.

2. Attach a copper plate with a latch clamp, for
example, on the inside of the side member.
3. Weld the hole up. A suitable electrode size is
3.25 mm.
4. Remove the copper plate and weld the inside
of the side member.
5. Grind off the weld evenly and clean off weld
splatters and oxides on both sides.
For larger holes a washer can be used to fill with
welding.
Collision with new holes.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Hole filling
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
83
3.4 Welding
Material specification
Steel types
The information below applies to all chassis frame
parts, side members and cross members, equivalent to strength class 28.
The following welding electrodes can be

used for DC welding (direct current)
ESAB OK 48.00 or equivalent.
Oerlikon Super Cord.
Steel 2152 equivalent to Swedish standard SIS

142152.
FILARC 35.
Stahl St E29 corresponding to German standard

DIN 17100.
The following welding electrodes can be

used for A/C welding (alternating current)
Steel 43 E corresponding to British standard BS

4360.
Suitable filler material for MIG welding

Filler metal: ESAB OK.
Autrod 1251 1.0 mm/Tubrod 1514 1.2 mm.
Gs Sk 203 CO + Ar 80%.
Mison 25 CO2 23% + Ar 77% + NO 0.03% 10 d/
min.
ESAB OK 48.15.
Oerlikon Spezial or equivalent.
Steel Fe E 285 corresponding to European standard 25-72.

Lowest strength (material) 270 N/mm.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.4 Welding > Material specification
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
84
3.5 Drilling
Instructions
Remove the burrs from the holes after drilling.
REQUIREMENT!
The following applies when drilling in the chassis

frame:
The diameter of the holes (A) must be less than

15.5 mm.
The distance between two holes (B) must be at
least 50 mm.
REQUIREMENT!
Always drill at least:
B
C
317 076
15 mm from edge (C).

25 mm holes (D).
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.5 Drilling > Instructions

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
85
3.6 Tightening torque

General
IMPORTANT!
Maintain bolt quality and prescribed tightening

torque when repairing damaged threads with insert.
Do not use the tightening torque described in this
chapter on chassis components. Contact Scania if
screws on the chassis need to be tightened.
General tightening torques (not valid for

suspension components)
The following tables show the general tightening
torques for screws, nuts and joints. Unless otherwise specified, the general tightening torques below apply.
Unless otherwise stated, the tolerance 15% applies to all values, as well as the following conditions:
Greased, untreated screws and nuts.

Ungreased electro zinc-plated screws and
nuts.
Cast iron or steel with electro zinc-plated
screws.
Ungreased phosphatised screws with electro
zinc-plated nuts.
Clean contact surfaces without paint or similar.
Union assemblies and threaded plugs

The values stated are for a tolerance of 5%. The
values below apply to tightening with a counterhold.
Thread inserts
The specified tightening torques also apply for
bolted joints with thread insert (HeliCoil).
In many cases, a thread insert is stronger than a
screw thread cut directly into the metal. This allows for more resistant screw joints, for example,
in alloys. For this reason, thread inserts are used on
certain screw joints in Scania's production.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.6 Tightening torque > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
86
Tightening and inspection torques
Table 1.
304 825
Assembly torque Nm
1. Special assembly and inspection operations.

1.1 Hexagon screws, hexagon socket screws, sixpoint socket screws and hexagon nuts. Also applies to captive washer and hexagon screws with
thread cleaning screw.
1.1.1 Metric threads, regular pitch. Strength class
8.8.
Threa
d
Nom.
Min.
Max.
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
M18
M20
M22
M24
2.9
6
9.5
24
47
84
135
210
290
420
580
730
2.5
5.1
8.1
20
40
71
115
179
247
357
493
621
3.3
6.9
10.9
28
54
97
155
242
334
483
667
840
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
87

10.9.
1.1.3 Metric threads, fine pitch. Strength class 8.8.

Table 3.
Table 2.
Table 4.
Assembly torque Nm
Assembly torque Nm
Thread
Nom.
Min.
Max.
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
M18
M20
M22
M24
3.6
7.5
12.0
30
59
105
170
270
360
530
730
910
3.1
6.4
10.2
26
50
89
145
230
306
451
621
774
4.1
8.6
13.8
35
68
121
196
311
414
610
840
1047
1.1.4 Metric threads, fine pitch. Strength class

10.9.
Thread
Nom.
Min.
Max.
M8x1
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M14x1.5
M16x1.5
M18x1.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x1.5
26
50
92
150
230
330
470
640
830
22
43
78
128
196
281
400
544
706
30
58
106
173
265
380
541
736
955
Assembly torque Nm
Thread
Nom.
Min.
Max.
M8x1
M10x1.25
M12x1.25
M14x1.5
M16x1.5
M18x1.5
M20x1.5
M22x1.5
M24x1.5
32
62
115
180
290
410
590
800
1040
27
53
98
153
247
349
502
680
884
37
71
132
207
334
472
679
920
1196
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
88
1.2 Flange screws with hexagonal head and hexagonal flange nuts.

8.8.

10.9.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Assembly torque Nm
Assembly torque Nm
Nom.
Min.
Max.
Thread
Nom.
Min.
Max.
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
6.7
10.2
26
50
92
149
5.77
8.7
22
43
78
127
7.7
11.7
30
58
106
171
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
8.1
13
32
63
115
187
6.9
11.1
27
54
98
159
9.3
15
37
72
132
215
303 291
Thread
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
89
3.7 Limitations
Attaching body to chassis frame
For more information about welding and areas
where welding is forbidden, see chapter 3.4 Welding.
REQUIREMENT!
Fasteners should not be attached to:
suspension components
Brackets for the anti-roll bar
areas at least 30 mm from a screw joint and/or
rivets (with the exception of the chassis cross
member)
areas within 15 mm of the external edge of the
flange
areas within 15 mm of holes
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.7 Limitations > Attaching body to chassis frame
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
90
3.7 Limitations
Front suspension area F 4x2 and 6x2

Welding is not allowed in the F chassis front suspension area, as indicated in grey in the figure at
side.
351 306
Bodywork attachment in this area of the chassis,

must be made with screws or rivets. If new screw
holes are necessary, follow the instructions in
chapter 3.5 Drilling.
A. Minimum 200 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
91
3.7 Limitations
Front suspension area 8x2 (F biarticulated)

Welding is not allowed in the F chassis front suspension area, as indicated in grey in the figure at
side.
351 307

A. Minimum 250 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
92
3.7 Limitations
Rear suspension area F 4x2

Welding is not allowed in the F chassis rear suspension area, as indicated in grey in the figure at
side.
A
351 308
A
A. Minimum 160 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
93
3.7 Limitations
Rear suspension area F 6x2

Welding is not allowed in the F chassis rear suspension area, as indicated in grey in the figure at
side.
351 309

A. Minimum 100 mm
B. Minimum 200 mm.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
94
3.7 Limitations
Central and rear suspension area 8x2 (F

bi-articulated)
Welding is not allowed in the F chassis central and
rear suspension area, as indicated in grey in the figure at side.
351 305

A. Minimum 200 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
95
3.7 Limitations
Articulation area (F bi-articulated)

REQUIREMENT!
No component or body part can be attached or

welded to:
1.
Pivot bearings
2. Brackets
3. Articulation brackets and base
349 815
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
96
3.7 Limitations
F 4x2 and 6x2 driver area

REQUIREMENT!
1
2

welded to:
1. Removable beam
3. Support, angle gear and steering columns
4. Accelerator pedal
5. Brake pedal
5
6
3
362 763
6. Clutch pedal
362 762
2. Pedal plate
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
97
3.7 Limitations
8x2 driver's area (F bi-articulated)
REQUIREMENT!

welded to:
1. Removable beam
3. Power steering gear bracket

4. Accelerator pedal
5. Brake pedal
362 764
2. Pedal plate
6. Steering box and bracket
362 765
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
98
3.8 Possible modifications

Cutting of rear overhang side member
F chassis 4x2
REQUIREMENT!
F 6x2 chassis
327 294
344 081
Never cut the side members too close to the suspension brackets. The minimum distance between
the suspension brackets and any cut are shown in
the following figures.
A. Minimum 240 mm
332 997
A. Minimum 200 mm
Example of side member cutting on the rear module
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.8 Possible modifications > Cutting of rear overhang side member
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
99
3.8 Possible modifications

Cut
The longitudinal and chassis side members can be
cut to adapt them to the fastenings and the width of
the body.
349 829
For information on how the beams can be cut, see

figure below.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.8 Possible modifications > Cut
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
100
3.9 Stabiliser
Examples of latching the bodywork to side members
339 631
339 630
The following section shows examples of appropriate methods for attaching a bodywork pillar to
the chassis side member.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.9 Stabiliser > Examples of latching the bodywork to side members
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
101
3.9 Stabiliser
332 995
Chassis side members
IMPORTANT!
It is not recommended to use this type of bodywork

latching along the side member of the chassis, to
ensure there is no concentration of strain on the
side member centre.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.9 Stabiliser > Examples of latching the bodywork to side members
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
102
3.9 Stabiliser
Fixing the columns of the body to external brackets
Most of the chassis extensions consist of open
square tubes. The following section shows several
examples of suitable methods for fixing a body pillar in an extension.
The examples for fixing extensions are grouped in

three categories:
Scania recommends that the end of the extension is

covered after the length of the extension have been
adapted to the width of the bus to be built. The cover plate protects the inside of the stabilizer against
dirt and rust.
Note:
The body pillar and the extensions are centralized.

The body pillar and the extensions are moved
to a distance less than half the width of the pillar.
The body pillar and the extensions are moved
to a distance greater than half the width of the
pillar.
The connections of the rear stabilizers require additional reinforcement. A later section shows examples of these together.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.9 Stabiliser > Fixing the columns of the body to external brackets
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
103
3.9 Stabiliser
The body pillar and the extensions are

centralized.
329 865
329 861
Weld with core plug in stabilizing buffer.

Weld the body column of the support.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
104
3.9 Stabiliser

moved to a distance less than half the
width of the pillar.
331 909
329 867
Use a gasket consisting of a separation insert.
Column welding to a spacer.

329 866
In case of displacement, the column and the stabilizer

are not centralized.
Fixing the column to a separation insert.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
105
3.9 Stabiliser

moved to a distance greater than half the
width of the pillar.
329 869
Use an extra column if the distance is greater than

half the width of the column.
329 868
Use of an extra column.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
106
3.9 Stabiliser
Fixing the housing of the air filter for the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis in the body
REQUIREMENT!
The support housing of the air filter should be

fixed with screws on the body structure.
347 050
1. Holes in the air filter housing bracket for fixing to the

body structure.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.9 Stabiliser > Fixing the housing of the air filter for the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis in the body
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
107
3.10 Connecting the Chassis

(F bi-articulated) 8x2 - intermediate chassis connections
The bodybuilder must build the structures and connections described below.
IMPORTANT!
For more information on the designs of intermediate connections, see the main design dimensions in
BBM via SAIL.
1
4
3
With regards to measurements between the axles,

follow the instructions in chapter 3.11 Articulation
unit of the articulated bus.
4
3
To create the extension structure, the bodybuilder

should use material with resistance class 32-35
equivalent to:
- LN36 (ABNT NBR 6655) and/or
- LNE38 (ABNT NBR 6656)
349 823
REQUIREMENT!
1. Extension structure of 1st intermediate module

(wheelbase 8,300 mm)
2. Extension structure of 2nd intermediate module
(wheelbase 6,700 mm)
3. Structure reinforcement plate
4. Structure connecting plate
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.10 Connecting the Chassis > (F bi-articulated) 8x2 - intermediate chassis connections
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
108
Extension structures - 8x2 (F biarticulated)
347 087
347 088
Example of extension structure made with tubular

profiles.
Extension structure of 1st intermediary module (wheelbase 8,300 mm) - 8x2 (F bi-articulated).
Extension structure of 2nd intermediary module

(wheelbase 6,700 mm) - 8x2 (F bi-articulated).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
109
1. Min. Rectangular tubular profile 50 x 80 x 4.25

mm thickness
E
A
2. Min. Rectangular tubular profile 50 x 50 x 2.70

mm thickness
A. 4,184 mm for extension structure of the 1st intermediate module and 2,584 mm for extension
structure of the 2nd intermediate module
2
F
B
B. 900 mm
C. 450 mm
G
F
REQUIREMENT!
The bodybuilder must build the structure identically (gray area), as shown in the figure above.
347 089
D. 482 mm
Note:
The arrow indicates the direction of travel of the

vehicle.
E. 275 mm
F. 390 mm
G. 560 mm
H. 200 mm
I. 588 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
110
Extension structures' rear connection
A
B
348 742
C
1. Mounting plate (4x)
A Minimum thickness of 16 mm
B. 480 mm
C. 178 mm
1. Mounting plate (4x)

2. Reinforcement plate (4x)
3. Reinforcement (20x)
Using mounting plates to connect to the rear part of

the extension structures.
A. 115 mm
348 743
348 744
2. Reinforcement plate (4x)

A Minimum thickness of 4.8 mm
B. 430 mm
C. 200 mm
D. 42 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
111
Front connection of the extension

structures
The bodybuilder must connect the front part of the

extension structures to the chassis as indicated below.
E
C
E
B
F
Horizontal reinforcement plate (4x)

348 741
2
1. Horizontal reinforcement plate (4x)
2. Vertical reinforcement plate (4x)
REQUIREMENT!
The bodybuilder must build the horizontal reinforcement plate identically (gray area), as shown
in the figure above.
B. 1060 mm
C. 757 mm
D. 31 mm
E. 221 mm
F. 150 mm
G. 678 mm
H. 50 mm
348 740
347 090
Vertical reinforcement plate (4x)

B. 780 mm
C. 430 mm
D. 220 mm
E. 200 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
112
3.11 Driver area

Connection
F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis
REQUIREMENT!
The areas of the radiator structure (1), floor frame

(2) and the upper part of the instrument panel
structure (3) must be attached to the body structure.
3
3
2
2
1
337 731
346 137
Note:
The attachment points in grey are valid for LHD

and RHD chassis.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.11 Driver area > Connection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
113
3.12 Articulation unit of the bi-articulated bus

Construction
Distance between axles for F bi-articulated chassis
type.
REQUIREMENT!
To adhere to the security requirement defined by

Scania, the distance between the axles and rear
overhang must follow the steps outlined in the figure below.
341 784
In building the bi-articulated bus, the wheelbase

has to be adapted with respect to stability, manoeuvrability, weight distribution and interior design of
the equipment. A bi-articulated bus built incorrectly can suffer instability in driving.
A. Distance of the front axle

B. Distance between the axle and the articulation unit
Distance of front axle,

A
Distance between the
axle and the articulation unit, B
Distance of intermediate axle, C
Distance of rear axle, D
Maximum rear overhang, E
6000 mm
1822 mm
8,300 mm
6,700 mm
4,300 mm
C. Distance of the 1st intermediate axle

D. Distance of the 2nd intermediate axle
E. Rear overhang
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.12 Articulation unit of the bi-articulated bus > Construction
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
114
Steering angle and articulation angle

The articulation allows a maximum angle (2) of
54. At 54, the brackets between the articulation
unit and the front module are subject to a large
force, which may lead to damage to the brackets.
The steering angle (1) is limited to minimize the
damage to the articulation unit, but even so the
steering angle allows an acceptable handling.
At 46 the end position sensor is activated, the engine speed is reduced to idle, the cylinders are
cushioned abruptly and the brakes are also activated.
Torsion angle
The chassis of the bi-articulated bus allows a torsion angle 2 in the articulation unit, but according
to the body type, the torsion angle may be smaller.
When the bus has angle less than 46, the engine
speed returns to normal.
337 726
The steering angle (1) is limited to 35.
The bi-articulated bus is equipped with a system

that warns the driver when reversing, when the
joint reaches 46.
Chassis torsion angle of the bi-articulated bus.
341 785
2
1
1. Steering angle
2. Articulation angle
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
115
Articulation unit
Joint bolted to the chassis
It is important that the articulation sensor unit does

not suffer damage during bodybuilding. It is only
permitted to walk on the parts embedded in the articulation.
To facilitate the bodybuilding process (separation

of modules for painting), the chassis is provided
with a provisional transportation assembly of the
joints (1) to the frames of the intermediate shafts
(2) with screws, nuts and washers.
REQUIREMENT!
Even though separation of the modules is not required, the bodybuilder should perform the final
assembly of the joints to the frames of the intermediate shafts. The following parts should be removed and replaced:
12 M20x130 screws
12 M20 nuts
Use the bolts and nuts provided in the accessory
box. The 24 washers used in the provisional transportation assembly should be re-used in the final
assembly.
The assembly torque must be applied to the nuts in
2 steps:
1.
349 813
Apply torque of 300 Nm

2. Apply torque of 600 Nm 30
IMPORTANT!
355 906
The washers are special and ensure the torque applied to the screws, and they should not be replaced.
In case of loss, new washers should be acquired
from Scania.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
116
Bellows
Scania does not provide bellows to bodybuilders.
Follow the instructions of the bellow manufacturer
when it is mounted. It is important that the bellows
become adequately fixed, as there are strong
movements during travel.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
117
3.13 Towing of completed bus

Front tow beam
In certain markets, there are legal requirements
that the bus is equipped with a front tow beam.
The tow plate must be manufactured and sized by

bodybuilder, so it is possible to lift the bus ready to
tow it.
2
A
363 089
Detail of the side support which is to be welded to the

chassis.
363 088
A. Minimum 420 mm
B. Minimum Thickness 6 mm
363 087
1. Hole for welding
The tow plate must be removable so its possible to remove the engine.
1. Tow plate, min. tubular profile 80 x 80 x 6 mm thick

2. Lateral support, minimum thickness of 6 mm (2), see
details at side
3. Screw min. M12x130 class 10.9 (8x)
4. Nut Min. M12 class 10.9 (8x)
2. Hole for access to the radiator guide frame, 20 mm

IMPORTANT!
The tow plate should be free of bodywork components (solenoid valves, horn, hoses, electrical harnesses, etc.) that might prevent the bus towing.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.13 Towing of completed bus > Front tow beam
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
118

Towing connection
The towing connection is delivered on the chassis
already secured in its final position ready for towing the bus. It consists of a support secured to the
structure of the chassis, space (1) to secure the
trailer power socket provided in the accessory box
and a pneumatic filler nipple (2).
Towing connection positioned at the chassis delivery.
1
2
346 161
328 920
Towing connection positioned at the chassis delivery.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.13 Towing of completed bus > Towing connection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
119
Use the bolts and nuts included in the accessory box to tighten connector C520 (1) to the
support.
Connect the connector C695, the supplied cable

harness and socket C520 in accordance with the
electric chart below.
C695
A
C520
C695
C795
313 173
313161
Towing connection electric chart.

REQUIREMENT!
The electrical socket and the pneumatic filler nipple for the trailer must be accessible from the front
part of the body.
A. Electrical panel
Note:
To supply the air system and brake-release system,

an oil- and water-free external source of compressed air must be used, with a maximum pressure of 12 bars, in order not to damage the APS
components.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.13 Towing of completed bus > Towing connection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
120
3.14 Bumpers
Bumper positioning
Front bumper
The bumper must be removable so that the cooling
package and/or engine can be removed.
339 616
Z
0
REQUIREMENT!
Body components installed in the grey area in the

figure above must be removable.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.14 Bumpers > Bumper positioning
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
121
3.15 Clamping and routing of hoses and cables

Clamping of cables and pipes
It is important for the pipes, hoses and electric
wires to be attached so that they are not damaged
by chafing or sharp corners, etc.
Pipes, hoses and electric wires must be fitted as far

away as possible from sources of heat.
Pipes, hoses and electric wires unprotected from
heat should be kept away from heat sources:
Hoses or plastic pipes must not be clamped together with steel pipes unless protective material is fitted between the pipes or hoses.
100 mm for the exhaust pipes and silencers
60 mm for the engine coolant pipes
40 mm for fuel pipes.

Hydraulic hoses between gearbox, engine and
chassis should not be stretched because the hydraulic hoses are calculated to take up movements
of the engine.
Hoses, plastic pipes and electric wires must not

come into contact with moving objects.
1. Example of protecting wires from sharp edges
Tubes, hoses and electric wires must be placed at

least 10 mm from any sharp edges, or the edges
must have a protective coating.
Hydraulic hoses must not be clamped together.
Whenever possible, fit clamps at sensitive points

such as close to sharp edges.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.15 Clamping and routing of hoses and cables > Clamping of cables and pipes
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
122
REQUIREMENT!
Electric wires must not be fitted next to fuel lines

or pipes.
Scania recommends a distance of 20 mm between

electric wires and fuel lines or hydraulic lines.
Scania recommends a maximum distance of 450
mm between clamps for pipes, hoses and electric
cables on the chassis.
REQUIREMENT!
Suggestion for arrangement of cable harnesses and
pipes.
Electric wires must not be fitted next to coolant

hoses.
1. Coolant pipes and/or heating pipes. They must be at

a minimum distance of 60 mm from any electric wire
(including the battery cable)
2. Battery cable. It must be at a minimum distance of
100 mm from the nearest electric wire
3. Electric wires or plastic pipes
REQUIREMENT!
Electric wires must not be fitted next to hydraulic

hoses or pipes.
Scania recommends that the maximum distance between clamps and lines should be 450 mm.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.15 Clamping and routing of hoses and cables > Clamping of cables and pipes
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
123
3.16 Extension connection of the rear overhang

With side member extension.
IMPORTANT!
IMPORTANT!
The bodybuilder must make a new side member

("U" profile) according to the dimensions below,
in order to extend the side member on the rear
overhang.
The new side member (2) must be aligned with the

rest of the chassis (1) as shown below.
There must be welded reinforcement plates between the original side member and the new side
member (internally on the joint), as shown in the
figure alongside (view Z).
F/2
328 079
A. Length of the new side member according to bodybuilder's requirements
View Z.
F. Min. 230 mm
G. Plate at least 6 mm thick

H. Do not weld within 15 mm of the edge of the side
member
D. 270 1 mm
E. 8 0.15 mm
1. Original side member of the chassis
Note:
2. Side member fitted by the bodybuilder
To see the types of materials for making the new

side member ("U" profile), see chapter 3.4.
3. Original cross member of the chassis
328 080
B. 2x90 3 mm
C. R12
328 081
I. For types of joints, see chapter 3.4

IMPORTANT!
Follow the instructions in chapters 3.4, 3.5 and 3.6

for the welding, drilling and torque processes.
X. Distance 1,200 mm
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.16 Extension connection of the rear overhang > With side member extension.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
124
Note:
Depending on the length of the rear lengthening,

side members must be used to interconnect the
new side members ("U" profiles). The use of
screws and nuts is recommended for attaching the
cross members onto the new side member.
Some markets require a tow hook to be fitted on

the rear. For this application, the bodybuilder
needs to leave the last reinforced cross member
ready to install the tow hook.
1
328 082
REQUIREMENT!
1. Cross member fitted by the bodybuilder
2. Attachment of the cross members with screws

IMPORTANT!
The bodybuilder is responsible for the size of the

cross members, including the closing cross member, taking into consideration all the strain and
forces involved in the lengthening.
328 083
328 131
Always use a closing cross member when lengthening.
1. Tow beam
IMPORTANT!
Follow the instructions in chapters 3.4, 3.5 and 3.6

for the welding, drilling and torque processes.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.16 Extension connection of the rear overhang > With side member extension.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
125

Without side member extension.
IMPORTANT!
Connect the body structure to the rear overhang the

chassis in accordance with the recommendations
for welding dimensions and areas indicated below.
With closing cross member
A
A
F
341 769
1. Vertical cross member

B. Minimum 80 mm.
C. 6.4 mm minimum thickness
2. Closing cross member
D. Minimum 40 mm
341 770
A. Minimum 200 mm
A. Respect the grey minimum weld restriction area of
160 mm
B. Fill in all holes and joints with welding
E. 770 mm
F. 270 mm 1 mm
REQUIREMENT!
The profile "U" of the side member has to be

closed.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.16 Extension connection of the rear overhang > Without side member extension.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
126
Without closing cross member

REQUIREMENT!
The profile "U" of the side member has to be

closed.
A
B
E
2
G
F
337 744
A. Minimum 200 mm
B. Minimum 80 mm.
C. 6.4 mm minimum thickness
2. Closing plate
A. Respect the grey minimum weld restriction area of

160 mm
D. Minimum 6.4 mm thickness
B. Fill in all holes and joints with welding
337 745
1. Vertical cross member
E. 770 mm
F. 270 mm 1 mm
G. 90 mm 3 mm
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.16 Extension connection of the rear overhang > Without side member extension.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
127
3.17 Painting
General
In the chapter there are concepts such as paint retouching, painting of the body and treatment of the
substructure.
Paint retouching means painting the welding

joints between the pieces of the chassis frame
and the bodywork components.
Substructure treatment means painting to protect the vehicle substructure from rust.
Environmental considerations
When choosing the type of paint great importance
was given to reducing the environmental impact,
as much as to the working environment as to the
external one. Scania chassis are coated with paints
that do not contain heavy metals.
Selection of paints system
Scania information and instructions must be considered in conjunction with the recommendations
from the paint supplier before the start of painting
work.
WARNING!
Paints and solvents contain chemical products that

can cause serious injury.
Carefully read the warning contained on the containers and the product information sheet.
Use the recommended protection equipment.
Avoid contact with skin and use in places with
poor ventilation.
Think of the risks of fire and explosion.
There are several brands and paint types on the

market. Always do a paint test on a hidden surface
to check the adhesion and paint combination.
Check with your paint supplier, if necessary. Follow the recommendations of the paint manufacturer.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.17 Painting > General

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
128
3.17 Painting
Paint retouching after welding
Pretreatment
Painting
1.
Use the paint system especially tested to get good

adhesion of the spray paint after pretreatment.
Use a dry cloth to clean all visible grease on

the surfaces that will be painted.
2. Wash them with a detergent
3. Wash them with high pressure water. The water temperature should not exceed 50 C.
Avoid subjecting to rolling spheres or similar
4. If there are rusty parts, smooth them off.
If 2 components of acrylic and polyurethane type

paint are used, good adhesion can be achieved
without having to rub down the surface. Start by
trying the paint on a small part of the component.
1.
Check the welding joints thoroughly. They

should be high quality.
2. Brush or remove the splashes and welding oxides.
REQUIREMENT!
3.
Apply an anti-corrosive agent in the prepared

welding joints and surfaces using an appropriate paint.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use epoxy paint as a covering due to its sensitivity to UV (ultraviolet) rays.
IMPORTANT!
The paint adheres best on sanded surfaces.
IMPORTANT!
Paints with a single component that air dry do not

adhere well to dried paints. Sanding on the dried
paint does also not encourage good adhesion.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.17 Painting > Paint retouching after welding
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
129
3.17 Painting
Painting of the body
Remove sensitive equipment during oven drying
after painting if the nearest temperature of the
components exceeds:
+ 90 C without current load for 1 hour.
+ 70 C with load voltage for 96 hours.

Sensitive equipment can include the control units
and components for:
ABS (anti-lock brakes).
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.17 Painting > Painting of the body
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
130
3.17 Painting
Substructure treatment
Before treatment
Treatment
It is very important that the vehicle is dried and

cleaned before the anti corrosive treatment is started. Remove all dust and dirt. Use a soft brush together with an appropriate detergent.
Apply the anti-corrosive agent to the substructure.

The anti-corrosive layer must cover all surfaces
which need to be treated.
Do not apply the anti-corrosive agent on rusted
surfaces.
Do not apply the anti-corrosive agent on surfaces
which will become hot when in operation.
Treat closed pipes with drainage hole internally
with the anti-corrosive agent.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.17 Painting > Substructure treatment
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
131
3.17 Painting
Painting protection
General
Component list
Paints and substructure masses can:
have heat insulation qualities

affect some material properties
reduce bleeding or draining
wear seals in sliding joints
reduce chafing in screw joints.
REQUIREMENT!
Protect the following components during painting

and substructure treatment:
Always cover the contact surfaces of rims and

wheel nuts when the rims are painted. If the contact surfaces are painted, the paint will be worn
upon use. So the nuts will not function properly,
and the wheels can become loose.
Wheels
Tyres, wheel nuts, wheel nuts covers, wheel

studs cover, rims and surface of rims mounting
Type plates, markers circuits and valves for
draining the compressed air tanks
test nozzles, filling and drainage nipples
Ventilating valves for APS unit, brakes, compressed air tanks
air chamber, air chambers' levelling vales
External temperature sensor
Axles and protection covers
propeller shaft, universal joints
radiator/pipes for the cooling system and inter
cooler
brake system components
exhaust pipe, silent
chassis serial number marking
steering wheel, pedals
electrical panel, instrument panel
horn
shock absorber, torque rod

compressed air connections
gearbox, engine and nearby components
grease nipples
drainage hoses and valve hoses
hydraulic motor, radiator
reductant pump and its connections
cable harnesses and pneumatic pipes
hydraulic tanks (expansion tank, steering hydraulic oil/clutch, reductant agent - SCR, etc).
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.17 Painting > Painting protection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
132

Positioning of hoses and cables in the articulation unit
IMPORTANT!
The articulation moves. Be careful not to subject

the electrical wires and hoses to wear and friction.
IMPORTANT!
Maintain absolute cleanliness during installation

of cables and hoses because dirt particles can cause
damage and malfunctions.
For more information, see Chapter 11.3 Installation of chassis components, cable harness section
of the articulation unit.
IMPORTANT!
Hoses passed through the floor of the articulation

should be fixed in the colour marking. The hoses
can be damaged if they are too long or too short.
BBM F > 3 Body connection > 3.18 Clamping and routing of hoses and cables > Positioning of hoses and cables in the articulation unit
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
133
Installation of hoses and cables in the

articulation unit, upper joint
Hydraulic and compressed air hoses are adapted to
be passed through the floor of the top articulation.
The battery wire and the ground wire should be
passed through the floor of the upper joint.
On delivery, the joints are fixed on the plate which
is provided with the chassis.
1.
For the fuel system

2. For the pneumatic system of the bodybuilder
3. For the bodybuilder cable harness
4. For the cable harness
5. Electrical connection between the modules
The rest position is used for the compressed air
system.
5
4
2
349 824
1
3
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
134
Assembly drawings for the articulated bus

For more information about the hoses and cables
which must be passed through the articulation unit,
refer to the mounting diagrams in BBM via SAIL.
Hoses and cables for the refrigeration and

air conditioning system
Scania recommends that the installation of hoses
and cables for the refrigeration and air conditioning system is done according to the instructions of
the bellow supplier.
IMPORTANT!
All electrical cables and hoses in the articulation

unit must have enough space, so they are not exposed to wear and friction.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
135
Floor and insulation
4.1 Floor
Floor in the front axle area
In this area of the floor, and depending on current

legislation of each country, the bodybuilder can
construct the floor with a slope so that there is no
interference with the nipple.
For more information about measurements and dimensions, see the appropriate main dimension
drawing.
X
0
+
Z
0
CL
332 991
Construct the floor over the side member, so that

the gearbox nipple (1) does not interfere with the
lower part of the floor.
X=A
Y=B
Z=C
IMPORTANT!
A = -230 mm
B = 0 mm
C = 145 mm
1. Highest point of the gearbox
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.1 Floor > Floor in the front axle area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
137
4.2 Access to the engine compartment

Inspection and maintenance
REQUIREMENT!
The minimum distance between the lowest point of

the body (finalised component) and the rocker covers must be at least 40 mm for the removable engine cover and 90 mm for the fixed engine cover.
Important factors affecting accessibility for maintenance on a vehicle are:
Inspection hatches in engine

compartment
It is possible to remove the engine injectors during
inspection and maintenance.
The engine cover can be positioned above the cylinders (See the respective main dimension drawings), taking into consideration the instructions in
the following pages.
Distance between the bonnet and the engine

components.
The size, number and location of the service

access covers.
For more information about the measurements and
dimensions of the floors and access hatches, consult the main dimension drawing in the BBM via
SAIL.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.2 Access to the engine compartment > Inspection and maintenance
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
138
Inspection hatch F HZ
Removable engine cover (1) - engine bonnet,
hatches or body structure:
The distance (B) between the lowest point of

the body and the rocker covers must be at least
40 mm;
Fixed engine cover (2) - hatches and body structures:

The distance (A) between the lowest point of
the body and the base of the rocker covers
must be at least 150 mm.
B
1
336 953
1. Any removable engine cover: engine bonnet, access

hatches or body structures
2. Any fixed engine cover: access hatches or body
structures
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
139
Inspection hatch, F NZ
Removable engine cover (1) - engine bonnet,
hatches or body structure:
The distance (B) between the lowest point of

the body and the rocker covers must be at least
40 mm;
Fixed engine cover (2) - hatches and body structures:

The distance (A) between the lowest point of
the body and the base of the rocker covers
1
336 954
1. Any removable engine cover: engine bonnet, access

hatches or body structures
2. Any fixed engine cover: access hatches or body
structures
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
140
4.3 Articulation floor

Articulation platform
The chassis is supplied without the articulation
platform, and so the bodybuilder is responsible for
the installation of a platform, according to the following instructions.
The articulation platform should be designed with

a centralized inspection cover (1 or 2) on the sensors and a centralized inspection cover (3) on the
articulation bearings.
1. Large inspection cover

A. 610 mm
B. 1238 mm
2. Small inspection cover
C. 397 mm
D. 300 mm
3. Bearing inspection cover
E. 100 mm
F. 1110 mm
341 788
REQUIREMENT!
349 810
349 814
Recommended dimensions A-F.

A. 433 mm
B. 367 mm
C. 1778 mm
D. 1615 mm
E. 1650 mm
F. Radius 920 mm
G. Section G-G
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.3 Articulation floor > Articulation platform
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
141
IMPORTANT!
Mount the rubber profiles (C and D) between the

platform and the floor so that the changes to the angles that may occur in the articulation, are absorbed.
REQUIREMENT!
The articulation platform should be connected to

all attachment points (1) and slip rings (2) provided in the articulation unit. However, the entire platform should be removable for repairs and
maintenance.
337 764
The illustration at the side shows the rubber profiles (C and D) in the original Hbner version.
Detailed section G- G.
A. Bus floor
C. Rubber profile
D. Rubber profile
349 811
B. Aluminium profile
E. Articulation platform
F. Plate with contact surface for sliding parts
1. Fixed support points (15x)

2. Slip rings (10x)
For more information about the lifting of the articulation platform, see the section in this chapter.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.3 Articulation floor > Articulation platform
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
142

Lifting the articulation platform
General
The articulation platform should be aligned with
the inner floor of the bus.
IMPORTANT!
Do not lift the articulation platform more than 150

mm.
IMPORTANT!
Use all bolted joints between the articulation unit

and the platform to raise the articulation platform.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.3 Articulation floor > Lifting the articulation platform
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
143
The fixing of the articulation platform must be able

to withstand a combination of forces in different
directions. Scania recommends a combination of
fasteners consisting of curved or welded anchor
plates (1) hexagonal bars (2) and slip rings (3).
2
1
The anchor plates may be, for example, made of

stainless steel. The minimum thickness of the anchor plates is 5 mm. The anchor plates must have
threaded holes on top for attaching to the platform
and the slip rings.
349 818
The hexagonal bars must be threaded at the bottom, to be fastened to the articulation unit and at
the top to be are fastened to the platform.
1. Curved or welded anchor plates

2. Hexagonal bars
3. Slip rings
A. For details of the anchor plates (2x), see next page
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
144
Details of anchor plate "A"
A. 259.20 mm
The anchor plate (A) must be built with the following measures to adequately support the articulation
platform.
B. 371.93 mm
C. 29.53 mm
D. 19.89 mm
E. 24.79 mm
F. 62 mm
G. 24.79 mm
H. 10.58 mm
I. 12 mm
J. M10
I
H
K. 11.58 mm
J
H
347 043
D E
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
145
IMPORTANT!
Install the slip rings on the spacers. Support platform in the 10 points available in the rear section
of the articulation unit.
349 822
Use the slip rings and screws provided in the articulation unit to mount them on the spacers (anchor
plates) of the articulation platform. Use new
screws to install spacers on the articulation unit.
For more information about torque, see chapter 3.6
Tightening torque.
IMPORTANT!
Slip ring installed on the spacer.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
146
4.4 External noise

Sound Insulation
General
Responsibility of Scania/Bodybuilder
The engine, gearbox and tyres emit most of the external noise.
For many markets there is a directive on external

noise with the limit value of 80 dB (A).
IMPORTANT!
The bodybuilder is responsible to the customer, for

bodybuilding in accordance with Scania instructions, and that the bus is ready and meets the legal
requirements for the emission of external noise.
Scania, in developing the chassis, certify that the

bus meets this policy and ensures that all chassis
built and delivered to the customer are in accordance with a previously tested and approved chassis.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.4 External noise > Sound Insulation
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
147
4.4 External noise
General recommendations and choice of

phono-absorbent materials
Suitable phono absorbent material has a maximum
absorption effect in the frequency area of 5002000 Hz. The absorption capacity is generally designated by .
WARNING!
Always choose non-flammable material for the

noise insulation of the engine compartment.
IMPORTANT!
Avoid heat sensitive materials near the intake manifold or air compressor hose from the exhaust system.
IMPORTANT!
Never paint an absorbent material, as this reduces

its capacity to absorb noise.
Noise absorption factor according to the "impedance
tube method" ASTM C384.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
148
4.4 External noise
Engine noise suppressor

The detailed design of the engine compartment is
critical for an optimum end result.
Drilling holes
When drilling holes, they must be sealed with rubber bushings. This is particularly important for
heating pipes, A/C pipes and hoses routed from the
engine compartment into the passenger area.
REQUIREMENT!
We recommend that this closure be removed to facilitate access for maintenance on the gearbox and
engine, and that the following material be used:
Sound absorbing.
Does not absorb oil and fuel.
Self-extinguishing.
IMPORTANT!
327 246
The entire right- and left-hand opening between

the side member and the lower part of the floor
around the gearbox to the front of the engine must
be closed so that the bus can meet the 80 dB(A)
level.
It is also important that bushings are sealed to protect the vehicle against fire.
1. Example of acoustic protection

WARNING!
Never use flammable material for noise insulation

in the engine compartment.
IMPORTANT!
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for meeting the

current legislation concerning noise levels for the
finished bus.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
149
4.5 Internal noise

Noise insulation and vibration damping
General
The vibration of the chassis that is transmitted by
the body structure can lead to a higher level of
noise within the body.
Use the largest possible number of sound absorbing materials to reduce noise level. Deaden the
large open areas of the panel with vibration damping material.
Put phono absorbent material in the inner part of
the body structure, to absorb the sound that the
walls, ceiling and floor are not able to keep outside.
Phono absorbent materials that have an outer layer

of perforated plates can be advantageous when
used on the roof. The surface area of the holes
should be a minimum of 25% of the total surface
of the plates.
Avoid rigid plates or panels without perforations.
Rigid plates or panels without perforations do not
have sound-absorbing properties. In the worst
case, the noise can even be enhanced as a result of
reverberation between two or more surfaces.
The noise propagated in the air is easy to be reduced by using intermediate wall insulation. For
more information, see the section on Insulation of
sound propagated through the air, further in this
chapter.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.5 Internal noise > Noise insulation and vibration damping
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
150
4.5 Internal noise

Principles actions to reduce sound
Soundproofing
The sound insulation performance of a material increases with the weight of the material surface.
Construction with double walls enhance the effect
of sound insulation significantly. Therefore, use
constructions with double walls, on the ceiling and
walls of the engine compartment and between the
engine compartment and the passenger area.
Fill all layout parts with a suitable sound absorbent
material. Avoid gaps between the two surfaces.
Damping of sound propagated by the

structure
The sound propagated through the structure is usually damped by a one sided or sandwich element
insulating layer.
With the propagated sound damping structure, vibration energy is converted into heat.
Use the sandwich method (floor cushion) to build
the floor and wall next to the engine compartment.
Noise absorption
There are various types of noise muffling materials
e.g., mineral wool, cellular plastics or felt.
The principle of phono absorbent materials is to
convert sound into heat by internal friction in the
material.
Phono absorbent materials could be, for example
fabric mats and fabric used in benches and curtains. It is important to choose a material with a
high absorption capacity.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.5 Internal noise > Principles actions to reduce sound
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
151
4.5 Internal noise
Floor
Floors have good sound absorbing properties if
they are designed as "damping floor".
Build the entire surface of the floor around the engine to the area in front of the front axle, as a
"damping floor", to achieve the best results in bus
insulation.
Note:
We do not recommend the use of metal plates on

the floor.
"Damping floor".
1. Upper floor panel (e.g., plywood)
2. Vibration damping layer (e.g., rubber)
3. Lower floor panel (e.g., plywood)
IMPORTANT!
Ensures a perfect seal between the floor and the

contour areas of the motor/pedal panel, base panel
and steps pit.
Any gap or flaw of this seal will degrade sound insulation.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
152
4.5 Internal noise
Floor covers
IMPORTANT!
Special attention should be given to sealing the

floor covers so there are no gaps that degrade the
insulation against noise.
Construct caps with sealing profiles on both sides,
top and bottom. The sound insulation of the cover
must be at least as good as the insulation of the surrounding floor.
346 150
1. Floor covering (rubber or PVC)

2. Aluminium profile
3. Damping floor
4. Rubber
5. Rubber profile
6. Sheet Metal
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
153
4.5 Internal noise

Engine compartment
IMPORTANT!
Never use flammable sound insulation for engine

compartment material.
REQUIREMENT!
Make sure that the insulation is installed securely.
IMPORTANT!
Protect acoustic insulation without affecting the

acoustic properties of the absorber.
REQUIREMENT!
Follow the instructions in the designs for the key

dimensions regarding the size of the engine compartment area that must be constructed with noise
insulation.
IMPORTANT!
Phono absorbent materials should withstand cleaning.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.5 Internal noise > Engine compartment
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
154
4.5 Internal noise
High floor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Protective metal plate (perforated thin aluminium) or grille.

Acoustic insulator (e.g.. Mineral wool).
Vibration damping material (1.6 kg/m).
Steel plate for the engine compartment (min.
1.5 mm).
Filler material (polyurethane foam, plastic,
mineral wool).
Heavy duty mats (8 to 10 kg/m).
Damping floor
Floor finish.
6
7
Z0
346 152
The figure shows a principle recommended for airborne sound damping and vibration propagation
by the structure.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
155
4.5 Internal noise
Low floor
The detailed design of the engine compartment is

critical for an optimum result. The insulation of the
engine compartment must meet the applicable legislation.
To prevent oil, fuel and the like being absorbed by

the insulating material, they must be protected
with aluminium sheet, fibreglass, or the like.
5
2
Insulate the engine compartment against noise to

reduce internal and external sounds.
In the engine area, thin sheets of insulation protection should not be used. Over time, secondary
damage can occur to the protective sheet and even
minor damage to this protective sheet can lead to a
fire hazard.
346 151
Construct the engine compartment so that the seal

is absolute and effectively separating the outside of
the bus from the internal passenger area.
1. Fibreglass
2. Acoustic insulation, for example, polyurethane or
mineral wool
3. Protective cover, for example, fibreglass or aluminium plate
4. Protective metal plate (perforated thin aluminium)
or grille.
5. Damping floor
6. Floor finish.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
156
4.5 Internal noise

Base panel and driver area
The detailed design of the sealing for the base panel and the driver area is crucial to the quality of the
final result.
347 078
346 155
Insulate the bottom of the panel and set the seal of

the driver area so that the seal is absolute, effectively separating the outside from the inner area of
the bus.
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.5 Internal noise > Base panel and driver area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
157
4.6 Thermal insulation

Euro 5
For bodywork with a floor height of less than 400

mm in relation to the top flange of the side member
and built of aluminium sheet, thermal insulation
must be installed in the bottom part of the floor as
shown in the figure to the side.
Thermal blanket of at least 15 mm with 3 layers: rock + wool glass fibre + aluminium reflector.
F 4x2 and 6x2
The insulation should be fixed so it does not come

loose and that the seams between the covers are
sealed.
3
A
We consider as a comfortable level the temperature inside the bus of less than 40 C.
The maintenance covers should be well sealed and
have the same thermo-acoustic insulation of the
floor. For more information about the seal covers
see Chapter 4.5 internal noise.
The thermo-acoustic insulation is effective as long

as there are no cracks, gaps or holes between the
inside and the outside of the body, so it is strongly
recommended that some sort of thermo-acoustic
paint on the thermal blanket is applied.
357 300
REQUIREMENT!
Note:
A. Up to the start of the steps.

B. Minimum 2,000 mm.
C. Minimum 1,100 mm.
1. Thermal insulation under the body floor
2. Cover for expansion tank and hydraulic steering system oil reservoir
3. Engine cover
4. Gearbox cover
5. Dosage unit cover
6. Reductant tank cover
BBM F > 4 Floor and insulation > 4.6 Thermal insulation > Euro 5
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
158
8x2 (F bi-articulated)
4
5
1
A
356 680
A. Minimum 2,000 mm.

1. Thermal insulation under the body floor
2. Cover for expansion tank and hydraulic steering system oil reservoir
3. Engine cover
4. Gearbox cover
5. Dosage unit cover
6. Reductant tank cover
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
159
Scania sends a heat deflector (1) mounted above

the muffler to minimize the muffler heat that is
transferred to the body floor.
There must be a cover for access to the heat deflector on the body floor. For more information on the
dimensions of the cover see the main dimensions
of design and Chapter 10 Service components access.
B
1
1
C
348 701
To access the components installed under the deflector (clamp and feeder), it must be removed
completely. If the deflector cannot be completely
removed, it can be reworked, as illustrated below.
353 602
REQUIREMENT!
Heat deflector reworked.
1. Cutting to be carried out
A. 310 mm
B. 280 mm
C. 470 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
160
Engine and fuel system
5.1 Constructing the engine compartment

Fire protection, engine compartment
This is particularly important with regards to heater pipes, hoses and air conditioning pipes that run
from the engine compartment into the passenger
area.
Unsealed ducts from the engine compartment can
give rise to a chimney effect in the event of a fire.
The structure over the engine compartment must
be sealed so that fire and smoke cannot spread to
the driver and passenger area. Avoid gaps with
parts that pass through the structure. If such is unavoidable, they must be thoroughly sealed. It is important to ensure that there are no cracks.
Materials in the engine compartment must conform to the requirements of FMVSS 302 (Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard).
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.1 Constructing the engine compartment > Fire protection, engine compartment
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
162
5.2 Air intake for cooling

Air intake for cooling
Calculation of grille area
The net area of the opening for the air intake of the
cooling system for the F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis
should be: Min 3,000 cm and for the 8x2 (F biarticulated) chassis: Min. 3,500 cm .
The bodybuilder must calculate the grille area by

following the example below.
Example:
Mesh area = (A1 + A2 + An ) x R.
Air intake grille
Where:
The bodybuilder must make an air intake grille in

order to create an airflow to the cooling package.
A grille may contain strips.
A = total area of the region in front of the cooling

unit.
Dirt separation
R = relation of the open area of the mesh (%).
A1
A2
A3
A4
An
327 250
REQUIREMENT!
Scania recommends fitting a mesh to the front of

the cooling package to reduce radiator contamination.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.2 Air intake for cooling > Air intake for cooling
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
163
Engine cooling system insulation
REQUIREMENT!
The bodybuilder must build a seal around the radiator to prevent recirculation of the hot gases from
the engine.
The bodybuilder can use plates, fibreglass, plastic
or rubber for insulating.
348 748
Note:
The insulation used around the radiator must be

easily removable to allow for servicing the radiators.
1. Front seal - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
1
1. Insulation area around the radiator
2. Limits of the body (bumper and front grille)
348 747
REQUIREMENT!
The front seal for the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis

must not be removed by the bodybuilder.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
164
Air intake grille size - F 4x2 and 6x2
The front of the body must be fitted with a grille

that is wide enough to allow the cooling package to
be removed.
For the front grille dimensions, see chapter 3.1
Chassis information.
A
Z
0
The removable crossmember (1) must not be obstructed or welded to the body structure or this will
prevent the engine from being removed.
REQUIREMENT!
328 090
REQUIREMENT!
Note:
The removable crossmember (1) must be accessible for removal.
The area at the front of the radiator must have a

clearance of at least 330 mm (A) above the chassis
Z0.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
165
Air intake grille size - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)

The front of the body must be fitted with a grille
that is wide enough to allow the cooling unit and
the engine to be removed.
A
REQUIREMENT!
For the front grille dimensions, see chapter 3.1

Chassis information.
348 756
The removable crossmember cannot be obstructed

and should not be welded to the body structure to
allow its removal and the removal of the engine.
1. Removable beam
REQUIREMENT!
A. Free opening of the front grille

B. Variable (0 mm or 300 mm)
C. 580 mm (condition for engine removal)
The conditions for the removal of the engine and

the radiator set are:
Components that fall within the gray area

should be removable;
If A C then B = 0 mm;
If A < C then B = 300 mm.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
166
5.3 Air intake for combustion

General
The F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis are equipped with an air
filter mounted under the driver's area.
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis are equipped
with an air filter mounted opposite the driver's
side.
REQUIREMENT!
The mouth of the air intake duct must be protected

against the entry of dirt or water during the bus
bodybuilding process.
REQUIREMENT!
After the bodybuilding process, seal the duct nozzle with the air filter housing and the bodywork air
collector box.
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for the design,

manufacture, and installation of the components as
well as their performance, in addition to ensuring
that the components comply with Scania requirements.
IMPORTANT!
See chapter 10 Access for air filter maintenance

and repair.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.3 Air intake for combustion > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
167
Chassis F HZ - RHD and F NZ - LHD/RHD
Chassis F HZ - LHD
The air intake duct (1) is supplied in the chassis

transport position to avoid dirt or water entering
the air filter.
The steel cover (1) mounted on the air filter intake,

must only be removed when installing the bodywork air ducts. This avoids water and impurities
entering the filter.
The air intake hose (1), is only for transporting the

chassis (with the mouth down), preventing the entry of water or dirt in the air filter.
332 138
332 139
339 618
REQUIREMENT!
Discard the air intake hose (1).
REQUIREMENT!
Discard the steel cap (1).
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.3 Air intake for combustion > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
168

Suggested mounting of the air duct - F HZ - RHD and F NZ - LHD/RHD chassis
The air intake duct (1) can be removed and mounted in the correct position during the bus bodybuilding process.
1.
Remove the sealing tape and the 4 nylon cable

ties (2) to remove the duct.
2.
Rotate the air intake duct (1) making sure that

the 4 pins on the duct fit into to the 4 holes on
the air filter housing, with the mouth of the
duct pointed upwards.
3.
End position of the air duct.
336 921
332 139
336 918
336 920
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.3 Air intake for combustion > Suggested mounting of the air duct - F HZ - RHD and F NZ - LHD/RHD chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
169
Maximum pressure drop

The pressure drop of the intake system is measured
with a clean filter in the turbo-compressor intake
and with full engine power.
A pressure drop higher than 3 kPa can cause increased fuel consumption and reduced life of the
air filter.
IMPORTANT!
Scania recommends that the bodybuilder run a test

of air restriction in accordance with the Scania test
procedures for the result to be valid.
REQUIREMENT!
The total pressure drop for the entire intake system

should not be higher than 3 kPa.
Minimum intake area
Effective area
Engine size
Euro 5 and
previous
9 litre
13 litre
250 cm
300 cm
Scania has calculated that the best usable area of

air intake to achieve the best pressure drop is 750
cm for 9 litre engines and 800 cm for 13 litre engines.
The useful area is the open surface where the air

flows to the air filter housing.
The floor area is measured by calculating the area
that is free of obstacles in a section at a 90 angle
from the direction in which air flows through the
inlet.
Scania recommends air intake versions that exceed

the minimum requirements for the dimensions of
the floor area and that are as close as possible to the
best effective area.
Note:
For very dusty operating conditions, Scania recommends that the air intake should be located high
up on the side or on the roof.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
170
Intake system pressure loss can be reduced by the

following measures:
reducing the number of pipe bends in the system
increase the radius of the tube bends
increase the cross-sectional area of the system
reduce the number of settings in the system design
use regular surfaces and radius

Avoid tube bends together and curves in S. If a
large number of tube bends cannot be avoided, the
distance between each bend of the tube should be
maximized.
All changes between system designs should be as
stable as possible. Switching between profiles
should be gradual and over the longest distance
possible. Avoid flat surfaces toward the airflow.
REQUIREMENT!
To ensure sufficient airflow to the engine air, the

intake tube between the body and the air filter must
meet the Scania requirement pertaining to the air
intake area. The inlet pipe must not be have very
tight bends.
327 292
Minimization of limitations and pressure

loss
A. Inlet pipe
r. The inner radius of curvature of the pipe must be at
least 40 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
171

Side air inlet
Separation of water and dust
Side air intake
Protect the air inlet against dirt using vertical or

horizontal strips.
The air intake for combustion must be protected

against dirt by means of vertical or horizontal
strips and/or a mesh.
The most effective method to remove the dust

without affecting the vehicle design is slowing
down the air flow. This causes water and other
heavy particles fall through the air flow and are removed through the charge drainage system. A
cross sectional area for the inlet system of air
greater than 600-800 cm reduces the effective
speed of the air flow so that this separation can be
implemented.
Complex water separators and deflectors usually
increase the air flow speed and hinder the system
operation. The cross-sectional area can be increased in order to achieve a better result.
Other requirements for side air intake.

To ensure a sufficient flow of air to the engine, the
suction manifold between the body side and air filter must meet the following requirements:
The manifold area must match Scania requirements for the air grille area for combustion.
The manifold cannot have closed bends.
The pipe should be smooth internally
REQUIREMENT!
All intake systems should have a drainage point located at the lowest point of the inlet box.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.3 Air intake for combustion > Side air inlet
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
172
A
A
2
4
348 699
Example of intake box for F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis.
348 698
1. Water separator
2. Outlet for connection with the air filter
3. Drain
1. Outer side of the body

2. Air intake strips
3. Air intake box, see details below
4. Connection between the air intake box and the air filter.
A. Minimum intake area of 250 cm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
173
A
A
A
IMPORTANT!
A metal screen may be positioned between the

grille and the air inlet housing so as to prevent
coarser particles from entering the air filter.
3
4
REQUIREMENT!
346 138
If a screen is in use, the most useful area for the

screen should be 750 cm for 9 litre engines and
800 cm for 13 litre engines.
Example of intake box for the 8x2 (F bi-articulated)

chassis.
1. Water separator
2. Outlet for connection with the air filter
348 700
3. Drain
2. Air intake strips

3. Air intake box, see details below
4. Connection between the air intake box and the air filter.
323 838
1. Outer side of the body

Z profile of vertical strips.
A. Effective opening for direct airflow
A. Minimum intake area of 300 cm

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
174
Sizing the screen
Dimensions for folded perforated grille.

REQUIREMENT!
Recommended dimensions for a thin and square

screen that is placed behind the strips.
d = 2.3 0.3 mm
f> 0.55
h > 15 mm
t = 1 (-0 +0.5) mm
t < 0.8 mm
a = b = 2.3 0.3 mm
f = ab / (t + at + bt + ab)
Permeability f> 0.55
Grilles bent and perforated with holes and larger

than the thickness recommended must be complemented with a fine mesh screen in the same way as
for the alternative with the vertical strips.
332 111
332 114
d = 2.3 0.3 mm
f = d / D
Permeability f> 0.55
REQUIREMENT!
a = b = 2.3 0.3 mm
t < 0.8 mm
332 112
f> 0.55
h > 15 mm
t = 1 (-0 + 0.5) mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
175

Air intake in the roof
IMPORTANT!
Install the intake opening in the ceiling near the

side of the body cover. This reduces the risk of
snow and dust from the ceiling or objects obstructing air intake. The ceiling cover should be sealed
to the ceiling.
REQUIREMENT!
The distance between the cover and the inlet tube

should be at least 160 mm vertically (C), and at
least 90 mm horizontally (D).
Protect the air inlet with a cover. The cover prevents the dirt, water and snow entering the engine.
The intake pipe should be at least 30 mm 5 mm
above the roof.
1
2
349 769
REQUIREMENT!
1. Ceiling bush
2. Engine air intake
A. 190 mm 2 mm
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for the design

of the ceiling cover, but must comply with Scania
minimum requirements.
B. 30 mm 5 mm
C. Minimum 160 mm.
D. Minimum 90 mm
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.3 Air intake for combustion > Air intake in the roof
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
176

Noise damping in the passenger area
The air duct must be soundproofed, as the suction
manifold can generate a low frequency noise,
which may be transmitted to the driver area.
The arrangement of the noise dampener is described in 4.5 Internal noise.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.3 Air intake for combustion > Noise damping in the passenger area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
177
5.4 Engine compartment ventilation

Evacuation of air
Without sufficient engine compartment ventilation
the service life of engine compartment components will be substantially reduced. This applies to
many components, but above all to plastic components such as:
Engine control unit, EMS.
Electric cables and fuel lines.

Apart from this, the compressed air will be cooled
less efficiently, which reduces the service life of
the compressed air system.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.4 Engine compartment ventilation > Evacuation of air
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
178
5.5 Exhaust system

Exhaust pipe outlet
Scania offers two side exhaust pipe outlet options,
right side and left side.
Exhaust pipe outlet, for rear, Euro 5

The chassis can be supplied with a rear exhaust
pipe outlet as shown in the figure below.
The bodybuilder must extend the exhaust pipe with
a vertical or horizontal pipe.
REQUIREMENT!
The diameter of the pipe used for the exhaust system extension may not be less than 110 mm.
A
A
325 738
Cross-section view of A - A in the figure.

A. 60 mm.
B. 110 +0 / -1 mm.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.5 Exhaust system > Exhaust pipe outlet
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
179
5.5 Exhaust system
IMPORTANT!
REQUIREMENT!
The exhaust pipe cannot have a bend with an inner

radius less than 80 mm.
Body components must be kept at least 100 mm

from the exhaust system, or else they must have
thermal insulation.
327 292
A. Exhaust pipe.
r. Minimum 80 mm.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.5 Exhaust system > Exhaust pipe outlet
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
180
5.6 Cooling system

Coolant and glycols with corrosion protection
WARNING!
Avoid contact with the skin when handling

coolant. Skin contact can cause irritation.
Hot coolant can cause burns. Always use protective equipment.
Ethylene glycol and other coolant additives
are highly dangerous if swallowed.
IMPORTANT!
Use only Scania coolant with antifreeze and corrosion protection on Scania engines. Products which
do not meet these requirements for use in Scania
engines may lead to failures and damage to the
cooling system. Defects and damage caused by unsuitable coolant may result in the cancellation of
the Scania warranty.
IMPORTANT!
Do not use an excessive amount of coolant in the

cooling system. This may cause the formation of
mud and corrosion. Excessive antifreeze glycol
may cause the coolant to become viscous. This can
damage the coolant pump.
IMPORTANT!
REQUIREMENT!
The cooling system must be filled with coolant and

clean water, mixed to the correct proportion.
Do not subject the engine to excessively high rotational speeds or heavy loads before it has reached
the normal operating temperature.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.6 Cooling system > Coolant and glycols with corrosion protection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
181
5.6 Cooling system
Coolant
The chassis is delivered with the refrigerant adapted to -21 C.
The coolant shall contain water, and some Scania
approved additive and shall be free of mud and
particles.
Approved antifreezes
Antifreeze
Scania antifreeze
Mixture table
Note:
Take into consideration any coolant that already

exists in the chassis.
Volume %
Freezing temperature C
35 40
-21 -25
50 60
-46 -55
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.6 Cooling system > Coolant and glycols with corrosion protection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
182
5.6 Cooling system

Filling the cooling system
Filling
1.
Use a coolant tank (tool number 588135) and

an adapter (tool number 99301) to fill the system with coolant from the lower filling point,
a union between engine and radiator. For information about the tools, see chapter 2.10
Special tools.
2. Start the engine and run it for about 10 minutes. Now the fluid level will decrease slightly.
3. Continue filling to maximum level.
The system must be bled at the highest point in order to avoid air pockets.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not fill coolant through the expansion tank

when the cooling system is empty or if no coolant
is visible in the level hose. Use the lower filling
nipple (1) of the cooling system near the cooling
unit.
337 797
When the expansion tank is empty and ready for

filling, this must be done by means of the filler nipple in order to avoid the creation of air bubbles in
the system. Do this as follows:
Topping up
336 950
When coolant is visible in the level hose, the system can be completed from the upper nozzle of the
expansion tank.
1. Filler nipple
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.6 Cooling system > Filling the cooling system
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
183
5.7 Fuel system

Fuel tanks
Fuel tanks fitted by the bodybuilder
REQUIREMENT!
Fuel tanks must be separated from the passenger

area by means of a partition. Many countries have
legal requirements for fuel tanks to be separated
from the passenger area by means of a partition.
Fuel system connections
When connecting the fuel system lines to the fuel
pick-up unit, a suitable type of connection must be
used, such as pressure, banjo, etc.
An external hose fastened directly onto the plastic
filler nozzle on the expansion tank must never be
used.
Note:
If the fuel tanks are fitted by the bodybuilder, he

will be responsible for certification of the fuel system.
Note:
Scania recommends that directive 70/221/ be followed even if it is not required by law.
The following recommendations must also be observed:
Fuel tanks must be mounted correctly so that

the chains and fuel tank brackets do not deform the tanks.
The chains and fuel tank brackets must be
mounted and fastened correctly so that there is
no related movement.
Fuel tanks must be equipped with a pressure
control valve. The valve must point downward
and be located away from the exhaust manifolds.
The fuel tanks must have inner baffle plates to
reduce the movement of the fuel inside them.
There must be no sharp objects near the tanks.
Scania recommends that fuel tanks are made

of aluminium, plastic or stainless steel. If ordinary steel tanks are fitted, premature oxidation
may occur, causing various problems for the
injection system.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.7 Fuel system > Fuel tanks
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
184
5.7 Fuel system
The reservoir must be mounted securely and

positioned so that there is no risk of fuel leakage from the tank or its accessories into the
driver or passenger area, in normal conditions
of use. Any fuel leakage must be directed toward the floor.
It is important to have good accessibility to the
fuel level sensor, the fuel pick-up unit and the
electrical connections. If necessary, a hatch
must be provided in the floor.
Access must be wide enough to allow the filler
cap to be completely opened and the filler nipple to be inserted.
REQUIREMENT!
The fuel tanks must have a side or lower access

that allows them to be replaced or serviced, if necessary.
REQUIREMENT!
Plastic fuel tanks must not be exposed to temperatures of over +57 C. If the fuel tank is positioned
near hot areas, it will be important to separate them
by means of a thermally insulated partition. There
must be a gap of at least 20 mm between this partition and the fuel tank.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
185
5.7 Fuel system
For the F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis there are three different options for positioning the fuel tank:
right-hand side
left-hand side
both sides
For the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis only the

transport (30 litres) fuel tank will be sent.
REQUIREMENT!
To meet the stability requirements, the tanks for

the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis must be positioned in the second module, or closer to the third
axle.
Right-hand side (300 litres) or

left-hand side (300 litres), or
right and left-hand sides (300 + 300 litres).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
186
5.7 Fuel system

Transport tank
Optionally, the F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis can be supplied with a transport fuel tank.
F chassis 4x2
F 6x2 chassis
For each wheel configuration and axle distance,

the transport tank has a positioning on the chassis.
317 098
It is not allowed to make amendments in the tubes.

To reposition the fuel tank the bodybuilder must
use an appropriate pipe for the fuel system.
6x2 chassis with 6,300 mm distance between the axles.
317 099
317 601
REQUIREMENT!
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.7 Fuel system > Transport tank
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
187
5.7 Fuel system
349 830
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.7 Fuel system > Transport tank
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
188
5.7 Fuel system

Fuel stickers
Fuel type sticker for the Brazilian market
332 097
Fuel type stickers are supplied in the accompanying materials box, depending on the market requirements of the chassis specification. The fuel
type stickers establish the minimum fuel grade requirements permitted for vehicles with a Euro 5 or
higher emission level.
REQUIREMENT!
Affix the fuel type stickers close to the filler cap,

preferably in the internal part of the filler cap access.
This sticker must be placed inside the access hatch

for filling the fuel tank.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.7 Fuel system > Fuel stickers
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
189
5.8 Water separating fuel filter

Water separating fuel filter
Note:
If an extra fuel filter with water separator has been

ordered, then this is supplied in the chassis accessory box. The extra fuel filter must be used in areas
where water or contaminants in the fuel constitute
a problem.
Before delivering the finished bus, it is recommended that the bodybuilder drain the water from
the water separating suction filter.
Fuel filter with water separator can be combined in

the engine-mounted fuel filter.
Fit the fuel filter with water separator on the suction pipe between the fuel tank and the fuel pump,
as close as possible to the fuel tank. The fuel filter
with water separator must be accessible for maintenance.
Fit the shut-off cock (1) on the fuel filter where the
hose from the tank connects.
the fuel filter is fitted with 12 mm push-in connections to make fitting of the fuel pipes easier.
1. Shut-off cock
2. Drain valve
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.8 Water separating fuel filter > Water separating fuel filter
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
190
5.9 Fuel lines

Fuel lines
If it is necessary to reposition any fuel line, proceed as follows.
The chassis fuel lines have the following designations:
RA - Line from fuel tank to engine.
RB - Engine line for the fuel cooler.
RC - Line from fuel cooler to fuel tank.

Markings may be found on the entire length of the
line, with a distance of 600 mm between each
mark.
Splicing fuel lines

Scania recommends that fuel pipes are cut with
plastic pipe cutters. In case of emergency, a sharp
knife may be used. Cut the pipe ends straight
across, making sure that they retain their circular
shape. Never pinch fuel pipes with cutting pliers.
Sharp knife.
313 176
Other information related to the marking system

can be found in chapter 6.2 Compressed Air Diagram.
313 175
Plastic pipe cutters. Part number 588925.
Cutting pliers.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.9 Fuel lines > Fuel lines
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
191
5.10 Bleeding the fuel system

Bleeding the fuel system
1.
Connect a transparent plastic hose to the bleed

nipple and to a recipient to collect the fuel that
comes out.
2. Open the bleed nipple and use the hand pump
until fuel comes out of the hose. When the fuel
system is empty, 100 strokes will be needed to
get fuel flowing through the bleed nipple.
3. Pump until fuel free from air bubbles emerges,
approx. 20 strokes of the pump.
4. Close the bleed nipple and remove the hose
and recipient.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.10 Bleeding the fuel system > Bleeding the fuel system
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
192
1. Bleed nipple.
2. Hand pump.
3. Intake.
4. Drain nipple.
5. Outlet.
311 163
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
193
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Transfer the plastic hose and recipient to the

fuel rail bleed nipple and open the valve of the
fuel rail bleed nipple.
Pump the hand pump until fuel free from air
bubbles emerges, approx. 50 pump strokes.
Close the fuel rail bleed nipple and remove the
plastic hose and recipient.
Pump approx. 20 strokes with the hand pump
until you hear the overflow valve open.
Start the engine.
311 164
1. Fuel rail bleed valve

2. Fuel rail bleed nipple
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
194
5.11 Emission control with reductant (SCR system)

Reductant tank location
Emission control with SCR (selective catalytic reduction) reductant tank is designed to reduce the
vehicle's nitrogen oxide emissions.
Mounting the reductant tank - F 4x2 and

6x2
The chassis can be delivered with two positions for

fitting the reductant tank, left-hand tank and righthand tank.
See the figures alongside to obtain information on
the location of the reductant tank in chassis delivery.
323 807
1. Left-side reductant tank
REQUIREMENT!
323 806
Do not modify the hose routing between the dosing

unit and the SCR reservoir.
1. Right-side reductant tank.
Note:
It is important to remember that the position of the

silencer does not change according to the location
of the reductant tank.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not move the dosing unit.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not modify the hose length between the dosing

unit and the reductant tank exhaust.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.11 Emission control with reductant (SCR system) > Reductant tank location
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
195
Mounting the reductant tank - 8x2 (F biarticulated)
Connection to the body structure - 8x2 (F

bi-articulated)
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis is only delivered

with the reductant tank positioned on the right side,
as shown below.
To reinforce the structure, the reductant tank

bracket should be connected to the body structure.
347 080
347 057
1. Connection points.
1. Right-side reductant tank.

REQUIREMENT!
Attach the reductant tank bracket to the body structure.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.11 Emission control with reductant (SCR system) > Reductant tank location
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
196

Accesses
The SCR reservoir must be accessible from the
lower part of the bodywork in order to carry out
maintenance and inspection of the components.
It must be possible to remove the reductant tank

level sensor. Some bodywork requires an inspection hatch in the floor.
The bodybuilder must ensure that the dispenser is

in its original position and easily accessible, if necessary through an inspection hatch.
1
A
1
320 754
1. Cover
A. Min. of 500 mm.
346 142
For further information about inspection hatches,

see chapter 10 Access for repairs and maintenance.
323 854
2. SCR reservoir
1. Dosing unit
A. Min. 50 mm from the side member to the dosing unit.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not move the dosing unit from its original position.
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.11 Emission control with reductant (SCR system) > Accesses
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
197
Valid accesses for F 4x2 and 6x2

Access through the external hatch of the bodywork
to the reductant tank, right-hand side.
Access through the external hatch of the bodywork

to the reductant tank, left-hand side.
325 704
4. Dosing unit
1. Reductant tank.
2. Removable beam
3. Access cover for the reductant reservoir filler nozzle
4. Dosing unit
5. Dosing unit hose
325 701
325 700
5. Dosing unit hose
1. Reductant tank.
2. Removable beam
3. Access cover for the reductant reservoir filler nozzle
REQUIREMENT!
6. Removable beam
REQUIREMENT!
For the dosing unit (4), there must be an inspection

hatch in the bodywork floor if it is not possible to
access the dosing unit from the sides of the silencer.
The horizontal crossmember of the bodywork (2)

must be removable so that maintenance can be carried out on the reductant tank and on the silencer.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
198
Reductant tank compartment hatch, right-hand

side.
REQUIREMENT!
Never fit the luggage compartment in the reductant

tank area, because the reductant tank will produce
white sediment if it overflows.
Reductant tank compartment hatch, left-hand side.
REQUIREMENT!
An anti-thermal blanket must be fitted in the lower

part of the bodywork area where the silencer is located. For more details, see Chapter 4.5 Thermal
insulation.
1. Reductant tank compartment cover

2. Reductant reservoir filler nozzle
A. When possible, leave a minimum measurement of
700 mm
B. Min. 1200 mm
C. Min. 50 mm between the reductant tank sides and the
compartment hatch
D. When possible, leave a minimum measurement of
140 mm
337 737
324 852

2. Reductant reservoir filler nozzle
3. Removable crossmember
140 mm between the upper part of the reductant tank
and the body structure
B. Minimum of 50 mm between the sides of the reductant tank and the compartment hatch
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
199
Valid accesses for 8x2 (F bi-articulated)

REQUIREMENT!
Access via external body cover to the reductant

tank.
The horizontal crossmember of the bodywork (2)

must be removable so that maintenance can be carried out on the reductant tank and on the silencer.
Reductant tank compartment hatch, right-hand

side.
REQUIREMENT!
341 779
1. Reductant tank.
2. Removable beam
346 166
For the dosing unit (4), there must be an inspection

cover on the floor of the body. See the cover dimensions in the key dimensions Design.

2. Access cover to the reductant tank oil fill
3. Opening for silent heat dissipation, area min. 700 cm
3. Access cover to the reductant tank oil fill

650 mm
4. Dosing unit
B. Min. 1200 mm
5. Dosing unit hose
C. Min. 50 mm between the reductant tank sides and the

compartment hatch
D. When possible, leave a minimum measurement of
140 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
200

Stickers for SCR, Brazilian market
Stickers for the SCR system are provided alongside the tank bracket as shown in the figure below.
The sticker is valid for the Brazilian market in vehicles with emission control with reductant agent
(SCR system).
IMPORTANT!
The patches should be protected from paint and

damage during the bodybuilding process.
Note:
L er manual
207511 0
The adhesives should be visible after the bodybuilding process via the filler cap.
L er manual
207511 0
Ler manual
348 691
207511 0
BBM F > 5 Engine and fuel system > 5.11 Emission control with reductant (SCR system) > Stickers for SCR, Brazilian market
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
201
Compressed air and suspension
6.1 Compressed air

General
Applications
REQUIREMENT!
The compressed air tanks of the brake circuits and

their air ducts should be kept in their original positions and should not be modified.
Modifying these components may impair the brake
response time, as well as certification of the brake
system. If you need to move any air tank from its
original position, complete the diversion request
form which is available at BBM via SAIL.
Information about how the deviation request is created can be found in Chapter 1.3
REQUIREMENT!
The APS unit must not be moved and its drain hole
and air exhaust must not be sealed or painted over.
Compressed air is used for many different purposes in a bus:
REQUIREMENT!
Tyre-filling equipment may not be installed during

vehicle operation since the use of this equipment
will cause flaws in the APS unit, reduce the useful
life of the air compressor and increase fuel consumption.
Applying the service brakes.

Releasing the parking brake.
Operating the clutch servo.
Operating doors and steps.
Operating and locking luggage compartment
doors.
Driver's seat suspension.
Among others.
Compressed air is produced by a compressor that

consumes a large proportion of the total engine
power and fuel. That is why it is very important for
the compressed air system to have no leakages,
even after bodybuilding.
In most climates there is always the risk of condensation forming in the compressed air. For that reason, the system has an air dryer integrated into the
APS (air processing system) of the bus.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.1 Compressed air > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
203
6.2 Bus body connections

General
IMPORTANT!
REQUIREMENT!
Connection options for bus body of air consumers

are:
Do not connect the compressed air connections of

the bus body to:
an 8.5 bar distributor in the front part of the

driver's position.
a 8.5 bar distributor to the left side of the gearbox.
a connection point (12.5 bar) in the air tank of
the central module (only for the F 8x2 "F bi-articulated") chassis.
a connection point (12.5 bar) in the air tank of
the central module (only for the F 8x2 "F bi-articulated") chassis.
brake circuits
Brake pipes
Brake compressed air tanks
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.2 Bus body connections > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
204

Location
Positioning of compressed air
connections
353 210
The figures show the location of the compressed

air connections.
Air distribution blocks for connecting the bodybuilder

(F 4x2 and 6x2 RHD chassis).
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.2 Bus body connections > Location
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
205
353 208
Air distribution blocks for connecting the bodybuilder

(F 4x2 and 6x2 LHD chassis).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
206
351 327
The air distribution blocks (8.5 bar) for connecting the

bodybuilder (front module 8x2 bi-articulated F chassis).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
207
351 342
1. Air connection (12.5 bar) accessories (central module of the chassis 8x2 F bi-articulated)
2. Air connection (12.5 bar) accessories (central module of the 8x2 F bi-articulated chassis)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
208
6.3 Compressed air tanks

General
REQUIREMENT!
The compressed air tanks of the brake circuits and

their air ducts should be kept in their original positions and should not be modified. Modifying these
components may impair the brake response time,
as well as certification of the brake system.
REQUIREMENT!
The compressed air tanks must be accessible for

maintenance.
Certain body projects require an external hatch.
If you need to move any air tank from its original
position, complete the diversion request form
which is available at BBM via SAIL. Information
about how the deviation request is created can be
found in Chapter 1.3
REQUIREMENT!
It should be possible to read the existing plate in

compressed air tanks.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.3 Compressed air tanks > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
209

Location
Location of air tanks
F chassis 4x2
Keep the compressed air tanks in their original location.
The figures show the location of the compressed

air tanks in the delivery of the chassis.
3
351 319
1. Air tank for parking brake circuit

2. Air tank for front brake circuit
3. Air tank for rear brake circuit
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.3 Compressed air tanks > Location
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
210
F 6x2 chassis
351 321

2. Air tank for parking brake circuit
4. Air reservoir for the air bags and bodywork accessories
5. Air reservoir for brake circuit tag axle
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
211
5
351 323

2. Air reservoir for the parking brake
6. APS regeneration reservoir
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
212
2 3
5 6
351 325
1. Air tank for central tag axle brake circuit

3. Air connection accessories in the rear module
4. Air tank for rear tag axle brake circuit
6. Connecting the bodywork air accessories, in the rear
module
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
213

Drain valve
REQUIREMENT!
All compressed air tanks must be accessible for

drainage, e.g., while checking the functioning of
the dehumidifier.
3
1
2
311 510
Compressed air tanks equipment are difficult to access with a chain or steel cable to which a ring will
be pressed and led to the side of the body, see figure.
Drain valve.
1. Compressed air tank
2. Chain or wire rope pipe
3. Side of bodywork.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.3 Compressed air tanks > Drain valve
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
214
6.4 Compressed air pipes

General
The chassis is provided with a number of compressed air pipes, which are connected to the various components of the chassis modules.
Reconnect the compressed air pipes to the connections after the body building has been completed.
During bodybuilding, compressed air tubes can be
released at one end, sealed and stored.
Cleaning
IMPORTANT!
Clean the joints externally before opening the

compressed air tubes.
Secure both ends as tube connections in components with adhesive tape, plugs or disposable bags
to be separated from each other.
Protect joints and threaded connections with adhesive tape.
WARNING!
346 171
Dirt particles in compressed air systems air,

brakes, steering or clutch command can cause serious operational accidents and problems.
IMPORTANT!
Remember to remove the protection during assembly.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.4 Compressed air pipes > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
215

Location
REQUIREMENT!
Attach the compressed air pipes tightly so that they

are not exposed to friction and wear.
REQUIREMENT!
The compressed air pipes and couplings should be

on the lowest point of the vehicle.
IMPORTANT!
REQUIREMENT!
The length and the area of compressed air pipes in

the brake system should remain unchanged. The
lengths and areas of compressed air pipes affect
brake response times, as well as certification of the
brake system.
REQUIREMENT!
Replace all the tube part that is damaged. The

length of the new pipe should be the same as the
original pipe.
Protect the compressed air pipes against grinding

and welding spatter during bodybuilding. Protect
compressed air tubes during painting.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.4 Compressed air pipes > Location
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
216

Pipe replacement
Dimensions d1
(mm)
(diameter)
d2
(diameter)
4x1
6x1
8x1
12x1,5
16x2
20.1
40.1
60.1
90.1
120.15
40.1
60.1
80.1
120.15
160.15
d2
Compressed air hoses must be made of PA12PHLY material and be able to withstand temperatures between -40 C and + 80 C and a maximum working pressure of 12.5 bar (1.25 MPa).
s min.
R
(Radius)
min
Weight
Part number
0.90
0.90
0.90
1.35
1.80
20
30
40
60
95
10
16
23
51
91
1751992
1483543
1483544
1483545
1483546
316 600
There should be no amendment to compressed air

tubes.
Note:
REQUIREMENT!
Dimensions and radius of curvature

d1
If any compressed air hose is damaged, it must be

replaced entirely.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.4 Compressed air pipes > Pipe replacement
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
217

Pipe between the center and rear modules - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
In the chassis delivery, the compressed air pipes of
the rear and central module are installed on beams
on the chassis frame.
Coupling blocks
1.
Use coupling blocks (1) to disconnect the

compressed air tubes (4) of the modules.
2. Use the support (2), the cover (3) and the coupling blocks to reconnect the compressed air
pipes.
The chassis is provided with a compressed air pipe
of fixed length.
2
1
1
3
319 492
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.4 Compressed air pipes > Pipe between the center and rear modules - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
218
Cutting the compressed air pipes

Use scissors for plastic tubes to cut a compressedair pipe.
Note:
313 175
Never cut compressed air pipes with cutting pliers.
313 176
Cutting pliers.
Scissors for plastic tubes.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.4 Compressed air pipes > Pipe between the center and rear modules - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
219
6.5 Pneumatic Components

Joints
REQUIREMENT!
Attach the compressed air pipes tightly in joints so

that they cannot come loose while driving.
REQUIREMENT!
Install the air connections in a location that is easily accessible on the front of the bus.
Air connections are:
351 343
Joint for external air filling.

2. Joints to fill air chambers of the front axle, labeled L and R. They are used to fill the chambers with air when the ELC system is not
working or when there is no pressure in the
system.
332 140
1.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > Joints
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
220

Parking brake circuit pressure switch
Pressure switch location
In chassis delivery, the parking brake pressure
switch is located under the driver's floor.
IMPORTANT!
If the pressure switch is moved, it must be installed

vertically. The pressure switch must not be tilted in
any direction, or be turned upside down.
351 333
If there is moisture in the system, the incorrect installation of the pressure switch could result in water freezing at the entrance to the pressure switch.
This leads to loss of function.
Pressure switch.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > Parking brake circuit pressure switch
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
221

Horn
The horn is supplied inside the accessory box with
electrical connectors and insert connectors for connection to the compressed air system.
Fit the horn to the front end of the bus using 2
x M8 screws and 2 x M8 nuts. The tightening
torque must be 21 7 Nm.
Connect the insert connectors to the air distributor and horn with a plastic pipe (6x1 mm
PAIZ, DIN 74324).
For information on the electrical connection, see
chapters 11.5 Connecting bodywork items and
11.7 Bodybuilder connections.
Connect the horn to the air distributor. See figure

at side.
1
2
3
331 997
IMPORTANT!
1. M8 screw and M8 nut
Position the horn below the driver area with the

bell facing downward and the bell nozzle turned
towards the front of the bus.
2. Plastic pipe
3. Connectors
4. Insert connectors
328 117
REQUIREMENT!
1. Horn connection point

2. Plug
3. Air distributor
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > Horn
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
222

Air compressor
Positioning the air compressor
B
2
360 884
1
A
Free area for removal of the air compressor, rear view.
328 086
B. Minimum 150 mm
REQUIREMENT!
There should be an open area for removing air

compressor, through an access door in the side of
the engine compartment, or according to the following images.
360 883
1. Positioning the air compressor (valid for RHD and

LHD chassis)
Free area for removal of the air compressor, rear view.

A. Minimum 170 mm
1. Engine cover tilt
2. Engine cover
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > Air compressor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
223

APS Unit
The APS unit must remain in its original position.

The supply tubing should not be changed.
REQUIREMENT!
The APS unit must be easily accessible for maintenance.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not block or paint the breather valve for the

APS unit.
In most climates there is the risk of formation of

condensate in the compressed air. Therefore, the
system has an integrated air dryer in the APS unit
of the bus.
Five circuit protective valve

A five circuit protective valve is used in the compressed air system for security reasons. The protective valve is included in the APS unit and
maintains the different circuits separate. A protective valve ensures that the system of compressed
air is maintained if there is any leak in a circuit.
303 326
REQUIREMENT!
APS handles the pressure and quality of air in the

compressed air system so that the circuits and
components work properly and do not sustain
damage. The incoming air is dried and cleaned.
1. Dehumidifier
2. Protection valve
3. Control unit.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > APS Unit
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
224

Compressed air connection for emergency air filling
Compressed air connection for
emergency air filling
WARNING!
This is a compressed air connection located in the

driver area used to release the parking brake when
there is no air in the system. It is in the form of a
tyre valve. Air can then be admitted by means of
the parking brake lever so that the parking brake
can be released.
For buses with no interlock valve: when the parking brake valve is being filled with air, the brake
will be released, unless the parking brake lever is
applied.
Note:
1. Interlock valve
2. Compressed air connection
It is essential for the parking brake lever to be applied when performing this procedure, otherwise,
without an interlock valve, the brakes will be released as the air is applied.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > Compressed air connection for emergency air filling
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
225

Access to the pneumatic test connectors
The pneumatic test connectors on the F 4x2 and

6x2 chassis are already routed so that the bodybuilder does not need to reroute them.
The pneumatic test connectors must be easily accessible for maintenance.
317 603
REQUIREMENT!
Pneumatic connectors F 6x2
1. Parking circuit
1. Parking circuit
2. Rear circuit
2. Rear circuit
3. Front circuit
3. Front circuit
4. Circuit for accessories
4. Auxiliary circuit (rear suspension)
317 604
Pneumatic connectors F 4x2
5. Support axle spring circuit

317 602
7. Driving axle spring circuit
Pneumatic test connector routing valid for F 4x2 and F

6x2 chassis.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > Access to the pneumatic test connectors
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
226
8x2 (F bi-articulated) pneumatic

connectors
348 733
1. Parking circuit
348 734
2. Rear circuit
Pneumatic test connector routing valid for 8x2 (F biarticulated) chassis.
3. Front circuit
4. Auxiliary circuit (rear suspension)
5. Driving axle spring circuit (left side)
7. Driving axle spring circuit (right side)
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.5 Pneumatic Components > Access to the pneumatic test connectors
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
227
6.6 Operation
Special care
WARNING!
The compressed air lines and electric cables must

be protected against grinding dust and weld splatters during bodybuilding. The lines must also be
protected from paint during painting.
It is important to check that the holes through the
luggage compartment walls are correctly sealed to
keep water and noise out. The sealing compound
should be non-hardening and fireproof to facilitate
possible removal of the compressed air lines.
REQUIREMENT!
For good maintenance, all air tanks must be easily

accessible.
REQUIREMENT!
The tanks must be fitted so that the water can be

easily drained.
REQUIREMENT!
It must be possible to read the plates on all the

compressed air tanks on the finished bus.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.6 Operation > Special care
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
228
6.7 Suspension
General
Suspension
F 4x2 chassis, rear suspension
Leaf springs and suspension air chambers care:
IMPORTANT!
A. 450 mm
A. 200 mm
F 6x2 chassis, rear suspension
344 081
There must be a minimum distance (A) between

the suspension brackets and the part closer to the
body structure to permit replacement of the screw
leaf springs and chassis components (gearbox
mount) when necessary.
347 046
They must be protected from weld splatters in

the course of bodybuilding.
They should be protected from paint, chemical
compounds and rubberising (bottom) during
the painting process.
Do not rest the electrode weld on the suspension multi-leaf springs.
Components such as cables and sensors must
also be protected in the same way as the suspension.
327 294
8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis, front

suspension
A. 200 mm
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.7 Suspension > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
229
6.7 Suspension
Air chambers
The air chambers are made of rubber. In the bodybuilding process the chambers must be protected
from:
weld spatter
paint during painting
sealant during treatment
REQUIREMENT!
REQUIREMENT!
There must be a minimum distance (A) between

the air chambers and the adjacent parts of the body.
Valid for normal vehicle level.
The air chambers for the suspension system, shock

absorbers and other components such as pressure
sensors and valves must be accessible for repairs
and maintenance via removable panels or inspection covers.
A
REQUIREMENT!
319 470
The chambers must be protected from spills, tyre

splashes, gravel and snow while driving.
A. 50 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
230
6.7 Suspension
IMPORTANT!
313 834
313 835
With the maximum suspension compression, use a

bracket (1) to avoid damaging it. The air chambers
(2) should never be pressed at any point during the
process of bodybuilding.
1. Support for maximum spring deflection and air

drainage in suspension air chambers
2. Air chamber
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
231
6.7 Suspension
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis is equipped with

electronically controlled air suspension, ELC
(Electronic Leveling Control) in the front axles
and traction and mechanically controlled air suspension, MLC (Mechanical Leveling Control) in
the other axles.
For the ELC system, a level sensor, advises the
height of the air chambers for the control unit via
an electrical signal. To maintain the chassis level,
the control unit regulates via the amount of air that
must be added or removed from the air chambers
via solenoid valves.
For the MLC system the level valves mechanically
control the level of the chassis, regulating the
amount of air that must be added or removed from
the air chambers.
MLC
ELC
341 796
Automatic level control for vehicle driving, ELC/MLC - 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis
WARNING!
Raising and lowering occur very quickly. So always use support blocks for work under vehicles
with air suspension.
WARNING!
The ELC module is active whenever the engine is

running.
WARNING!
Due to the high risk of accidents by crushing, never remove, replace, or perform any maintenance on
the sensor level when the ELC system is active.
There will also be the risk of accidents by crushing
if:
1.
there is hole in an air chamber or tube

2. a tube of compressed air is disconnected
3. the electrically operated solenoid valve that
empties the air chambers is activated
4. a sensor level is damaged while the ELC system is active
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.7 Suspension > Automatic level control for vehicle driving, ELC/MLC - 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
232
6.7 Suspension
Location of air chamber filling connections
IMPORTANT!
All four filler connections should be accessible and

should not be hidden by the bodywork.
F 6x2 chassis, rear axle
8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis, front axle
The rear and tag axle connections (1) are permanently installed under the chassis.
The external filler connections of the front axle air

chambers (1), are installed on a bracket provisionally positioned on the front of the chassis. The
bodybuilder must permanently install the bracket
with the connections in an accessible place at the
front of the bus, as shown below.
341 797
The connection goes right to the chamber's right

side, the left will connect the chamber to the left.
Mark the connections with an inscription to the
right and left.
341 798
F 6x2 chassis connections for adjusting the height of

the rear air chambers.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.7 Suspension > Location of air chamber filling connections
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
233
6.7 Suspension
Chassis 8x2 (F bi-articulated), drive axle

The external filler connections of the drive axle air
chambers (1) are mounted on a bracket provisionally positioned on the chassis. The bodybuilder
must permanently install the bracket with the connections in an accessible place on the side of the
bus.
WARNING!
Due to the high risk of accidents by crushing, never remove, replace, or perform any maintenance on
the sensor level when the ELC system is active.
Emergency Driving (inoperative ELC

module)
The raising and lowering of the vehicle can be adjusted by means of the filler connections for the air
chambers as described previously.
341 799
8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis connections for adjusting

the height of the rear air chambers.
BBM F > 6 Compressed air and suspension > 6.7 Suspension > Location of air chamber filling connections
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
234
Control system
7.1 Steering
Steering system

REQUIREMENT!
The distance between the moving parts of the

steering and adjacent parts must not be less than 25
mm.
1
1
REQUIREMENT!
The steering system is a safety system. All work

with steering must be performed with great care.
Note:
347 054
IMPORTANT!
346 144
Changes and splices cannot be made on the vertical and horizontal steering columns.
For floor installation, see Chapter 9.2 Ergonomics.

REQUIREMENT!
Do not loosen bolts (1) and (2) on the steering system.
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.1 Steering > Steering system
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
236
7.1 Steering
Disassembly of the steering wheel and

clock spring
1.
Remove the 2 screws holding the horn cover

and then remove the cover.
2.
Disconnect the connector from the clock

spring.
IMPORTANT!
Carefully follow the instructions below to prevent

the clock spring being damaged when the steering
wheel or steering column is removed.
327 266
Scania recommends that the bodybuilder leave the

steering wheel in place.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
237
7.1 Steering
3.
Loosen the screw and remove the wheel.
4.
Loosen and remove the steering column casings.
5.
Loosen the attachment lugs and remove the

clock spring.
The figure shows the steering column casings for the

fixed instrument panel.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
238
7.2 Clutch control

General
WARNING!
Always wear protective goggles. Hydraulic fluid is

corrosive and can cause permanent eye damage.
REQUIREMENT!
Use hydraulic fluid type SAE J 1703 D.O.T:3-4.
REQUIREMENT!
The filler receptacle must be absolutely clean

when filling up with fresh fluid. There must be no
trace of mineral-based grease or oil.
REQUIREMENT!
REQUIREMENT!
Cleanliness is of the utmost importance when

working on the hydraulic system.
Used brake fluid cannot be reused and must be discarded.
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.2 Clutch control > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
239
7.2 Clutch control

Fitting the hydraulic fluid reservoir
The hydraulic fluid reservoir must be positioned
above the union nipple (4) to ensure that it supplies
the master cylinder (3).
REQUIREMENT!
The hose (1) must be positioned underneath along

its entire length starting from the reservoir (2). If
the reservoir is located closer to the nipple then the
hose can be cut off.
The fluid level in the reservoir must be between the

minimum and maximum as shown in grey below.
4
331 648
REQUIREMENT!
The fitting (4) on the master cylinder must be

pointed upward.
REQUIREMENT!
The hydraulic fluid reservoir (2) must be accessible for filling and checking of fluid level.
320 374
REQUIREMENT!
The hose (1) cannot have traps or restrictions,

which block the flow of hydraulic fluid.
REQUIREMENT!
The master cylinder (3) must be accessible for removal, inspection and maintenance.
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.2 Clutch control > Fitting the hydraulic fluid reservoir
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
240
7.3 Gear-changing system

General
There are two types of gear changing system:
Mechanical gear box for F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis.
Automatic gearbox for 8x2 (F bi-articulated)

chassis.
For more information on the automatic gearbox,
see Chapter 9.5 Instrument panel.
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.3 Gear-changing system > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
241

Mechanical gearbox
The mechanical gear-changing system consists of
a gear selector with two cables. The cables transfer
the longitudinal and transverse movements of the
gear selector to the gearbox.
The gear selector and cables are supplied in the
recommended position, which allows the cables to
move easily. Do not reposition the gear selector or
the cables.
Note:
Do not secure the cables with too much force, or

rather, do not tighten cable fasteners, clamps and
similar items too much or they could crush the cable covers and hinder the movement of the cables
inside the cover.
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.3 Gear-changing system > Mechanical gearbox
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
242

Gear selector transport bracket
The chassis is delivered with the gear selector already fitted in the required position.
The gear selector transport bracket must be removed and discarded, though the gear selector
must remain in the required position.
REQUIREMENT!
327 296
327 295
The transport bracket (1) must be removed from

the chassis.
RHD Chassis.
LHD Chassis.
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.3 Gear-changing system > Gear selector transport bracket
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
243

Gear shift cable guide
The purpose of the gear shift cable guides (1) is to
avoid the gear change cables from coming into
contact with the engine and chassis components.
F Chassis LHD
F Chassis RHD
REQUIREMENT!
336 951
344 092
The gear shift cable guides must remain permanently attached to the chassis.
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.3 Gear-changing system > Gear shift cable guide
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
244

Gear selector position
The chassis is delivered with the gear selector already fitted in the required position.
The gear selector transport bracket must be removed and discarded, though the gear selector
must remain in the required position.
RHD chassis
I. 628.9 mm
+
X
0
Note:
The location of the gear selector for the RHD chassis may vary according to the following instruction:
Z
0
X2 = D
Y2 = E
Z2 = F
X1 = A
Y1 = B
Z1 = C
X0 = Front axle centre line part number
X3 = G
Y3 = H
Z3 = I
CL
327 299
Y
0
A variation of 10/-10 mm is allowed on the X

axle.
A variation of 10/-15 mm is allowed on the Y
axle.
A variation of 10/-10 mm is allowed on the Z
axle.
A. -1,213.6 mm
B. 294.3 mm
C. 628.9 mm
D. -1,091.1 mm
E. 407.8 mm
F. 628.9 mm
G. -1,091.6 mm
H. 293.8 mm
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.3 Gear-changing system > Gear selector position
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
245
LHD chassis
+
I. 416.3 mm
Note:
X0 = Front axle centre line part number
The location of the gear selector for the LHD chassis may vary according to the following instruction:
X
0
+
Z
0
A variation of 10/-10 mm is allowed on the X

axle.
A variation of 0/-15 mm is allowed on the Y
axle.
A variation of 10/-10 mm is allowed on the Z
axle.
X1 = A
Y1 = B
Z1 = C
IMPORTANT!
X2 = D
Y2 = E
Z2 = F
X3 = G
Y3 = H
Z3 = I
CL
Fit the gear selector according to the dimensions

specified in the figures.
327 300
Y
0
A. -1,219.2 mm
B. -338.9 mm
C. 442.5 mm
D. -1,102.9 mm
E. -358.4 mm
F. 411.6 mm
G. -1,120.5 mm
H. -470.9 mm
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.3 Gear-changing system > Gear selector position
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
246

Attaching the gear selector - RHD
The attachment of the gear selector can be done in

two ways:
Hole drawing of the gear selector

The attachment of the gear selector must follow
the holes in the lever bracket as shown in the figure.
A
B
Tilting selector
Removable selector
IMPORTANT!
The gear selector must be secured independently to

the engine cover.
D E
F G
F
H
I
J
341 767
The attachment of the lever bracket gear change in

the engine cover for the RHD chassis must allow
access for maintenance on the engine oil filter.
A =311.5 mm
B =226.5 mm
C =M8 (x 4)
D =156 mm
E =114 mm
F =57 mm
G =17 mm
H =65 mm
I =57 mm
J =122 mm
BBM F > 7 Control system > 7.3 Gear-changing system > Attaching the gear selector - RHD
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
247
Tilting selector
The figure alongside illustrates the recommendation for the tilter attachment of the gear selector
(2).
REQUIREMENT!
The bodybuilder must ensure that the gear selector

position, supplied by Scania with a transport
bracket (1), is preserved.
REQUIREMENT!
The tilting gear selector must be fitted to allow access for maintenance on the engine oil filter (3).
341 765
1. Transport bracket
2. Tilting selector bracket
3. Engine oil filter
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
248
Removable selector
The figure alongside illustrates the recommendation for the removeable attachment of the gear selector (2).
REQUIREMENT!
The bodybuilder must ensure that the gear selector

position, supplied by Scania with a transport
bracket (1), is preserved.
REQUIREMENT!
The removeable gear selector must be fitted to allow access for maintenance on the engine oil filter
(3).
341 766
1. Transport bracket
2. Removable selector bracket
3. Engine oil filter
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
249
Gear lever boot
Parts for fitting the gear lever boot are provided

within the accessory box:
2
3
Bearing
Boot
Boot support
4
5
Note:
The holes in the gear lever support, do not correspond with the holes in the boot support, both being installed in the bonnet of the bodywork.
WARNING!
339 628
Use the components sent by Scania for boot assembly to avoid passing noise.
1. Gear-changing lever
2. Bearing
3. Boot
4. Boot support
5. Body bonnet
6. Gear lever support
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
250
Note:
REQUIREMENT!
The gear selector must be secured to the engine

cover with screws, using a metallic plate to reinforce the fibre of the bonnet.
A rubber cap with a bracket ring is supplied inside

the separate parts box for finishing and insulating
the gear selector.
327 301
1. Example of metallic plate for attaching the gear selector to the bonnet
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
251
Climate system
8.1 Heating
Connecting the heating system
Connecting the heating system to the
engine cooling system
Position the greatest possible number of hot water
pipes inside the bus. In case of a more complicated
heating system Scania recommends consulting the
supplier instructions. Ensure that all pipes which
do not pass inside the bus are well insulated.
REQUIREMENT!
For the 8x2 chassis add an extra pump to the heating circuit with a maximum pressure of 2 bar to ensure the flow of water throughout the body tubing
and no damage to the internal engine seal joints.
Scania recommends the use of an additional circulation pump to ensure sufficient flow through the
heating system, and the increase of the flow of water improves the performance of the windscreen
defroster.
The driver's area should have a separate heating
system connected in parallel with the passenger
compartment heating system. This enables the
driver to turn off the heating system in the passenger compartment in order to more quickly heat the
driver's area and front windscreen.
BBM F > 8 Climate system > 8.1 Heating > Connecting the heating system
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
253
8.1 Heating
2
3
332 142
1. Convector
2. Defroster
3. Heating fan
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
254
8.1 Heating
When filling an empty heating system, it is important that there are bleed nipples in the heating system. These nipples must be located at the highest
points in the system or where there is a risk of air
pockets occurring.
Always fill up the heating system with coolant
within the specified concentration, through the
draining nipple. The engine may only run if the expansion tank is supplied with coolant.
F HZ 4x2, 6x2 and F NB 8x2 - Thermostat

value on the side member
The bodywork heating system connections are positioned in accordance with the following figures.
The connections are attached to the chassis and
sealed with a plug.
A shut-off valve with an R1 " internal thread
must be fitted on both lines by the bodybuilder.
Hoses in the heating system must withstand pressure surges of up to 1.5 bar.
REQUIREMENT!
2
3
346 149
Bodywork heating connection
F NB 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
The chassis cooling system must be filled with

coolant and clean water, mixed to the correct concentration.
1. Return to the engine (cold water)

2. Draining or filler nipple for coolant
3. Engine outlet (hot water)
See the table in chapter 5.5 Cooling system.
327 244
F HZ 4x2 and 6x2.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
255
8.1 Heating
F HZ 4x2 e 6x2- Engine thermostat valve

The engine return connection is secured to the
chassis and closed with a plug. The bodybuilder
must install a shut-off valve with an R1 " internal
thread on the return line.
The flange on the engine outlet is supplied closed
and must be replaced with an open flange (4). A
shut-off valve must be installed on the engine water outlet line by the bodybuilder.
The connection for the coolant outlet from the

chassis must be sufficiently flexible to accommodate engine movement.
1
2
332 144
REQUIREMENT!
REQUIREMENT!
336 908

3. Engine thermostat valve
The bodybuilder must request the Scania dealer to

replace the closed flange with an open flange (4).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
256
8.1 Heating
F NZ 4x2 - Thermostat valve on engine

The engine return connection is secured to the
chassis and closed with a plug. The bodybuilder
must install a shut-off valve with an R1 " internal
thread on the return line.
The flange on the engine outlet is supplied closed

and must be replaced with an open flange (4). A
shut-off valve must be installed on the engine water outlet line by the bodybuilder.
REQUIREMENT!
The connection for the coolant outlet from the

chassis must be sufficiently flexible to accommodate engine movement.
REQUIREMENT!
The bodybuilder must request the Scania dealer to

replace the closed flange with an open flange (4).
336 909
332 145
2
3. Engine thermostat valve
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
257
8.2 Air conditioning

General
Grounding the A/C compressor
A/C torque compensation
Ground to the chassis frame in order to protect

components secured onto the compressor and the
compressor components themselves. Then ground
from the compressor to the chassis frame's ground
screw.
The chassis requires a signal from the bodywork

system when the A/C compressor uses torque.
1.
Use 10 mm cable terminals for the chassis

frame's ground screw and the compressors for
grounding.
2. Use the pre-drilled holes on the compressors
for grounding between the compressors.
3. Use a black electrical cable with a minimum
area of 1.5 mm.
4. Tighten the M10 ground nut to 30 Nm, 3
Nm.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not loosen the ground nut M12.
The function can be activated with a discreet signal

via C691-13 or with a BCS signal, message 5 (AC
PercentTorque) via the CAN interface. Scania recommends using the signal via the CAN interface
because it provides a more precise and optimised
gear change strategy.
REQUIREMENT!
The A/C compressor maximum consumption value must be specified according to the BBFS specimen document.
The bus bodybuilder must specify the maximum

torque consumption value of the A/C compressor
according to the BBFS specimen document. The
chassis is supplied with a predefined value depending on the configuration, but the bus bodybuilder is
responsible for ensuring that the final value corresponds to the A/C compressor specification.
For more information, consult chapter 11.7 Bodybuilder connections and 11.6 Bodywork connections via the CAN system.
REQUIREMENT!
The bodywork system must supply signals to the

chassis when the A/C compressor is active.
BBM F > 8 Climate system > 8.2 Air conditioning > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
258

A/C for the F HZ and F NZ chassis
There are two power take-off alternatives to drive

the air conditioning system compressor pulley.
A/C engine pulley.

Engine power take-off (PTO).
WARNING!
The engine power take-off (PTO) is only available

for the F HZ chassis with engine thermostat valve
assembly on the engine.
A/C engine pulley.

If the chassis is specified to be air conditioning
ready, the 260 mm diameter A/C engine pulley
will be sent already mounted on the engine.
The figure indicates the mounting positions for the

A/C engine pulley for F NZ and F HZ chassis.
IMPORTANT!
Make sure that the compressor pulley is

aligned with the engine pulley. The engine is
inclined 5 degrees in relation to the chassis.
A double drive belt (double-V) must be used.
The length of the drive belt must be defined
between the bodybuilder and the air conditioner supplier, taking into consideration the diameter of the A/C transmission pulleys, the width
of the belt, the distance between the pulleys,
etc.
There must be enough space to remove the air
compressor to loosen and stretch the drive
belt.
There must be a minimum of 30 mm play between the moving components of the air-conditioning system in relation to the bodywork
chassis components.
313 754
The bodybuilder is responsible for installing the air

conditioning system and all other associated components.
1. A/C engine pulley for F NZ chassis

2. A/C engine pulley for F HZ chassis
To obtain information about positioning the F HZ

and F NZ engine, see the general dimension drawings available on BBM via SAIL.
BBM F > 8 Climate system > 8.2 Air conditioning > A/C for the F HZ and F NZ chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
259
Suggested installation (LHD chassis)

To position the F HZ engine, the intermediate pulley bearing must be installed to prevent interference with the thermostat valve hose.
Note:
2
1
313 752
To position the F NZ engine, the bearing does not

need to be installed.
2. Intermediate pulley is necessary to prevent interference between the belt and the hose
313 753
329 821
3. Cooling system hose, applicable to F HZ chassis
1. Bearing
Isometric view of air conditioning installation.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
260
Suggested positioning (RHD chassis)
329 007
329 006
The figures below show the positioning of the A/C

compressor.
Isometric view.
Plan view.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
261
Engine power take-off (PTO) - F HZ
Assembly of the hydraulic pump and

pulley to drive the compressor
The F HZ chassis can be specified with the air-conditioning being driven via the engine power takeoff (PTO - Power Take Off).
1.
Either of the following may be installed on the

power take-off:
Pulley to drive the compressor;

Hydraulic pump to drive the hydraulic motor.
Dealer responsibility: Remove the protection

cover (1) and the two screws (2) for the installation of the power take-off to display the flywheel gear.
1
2
REQUIREMENT!
336 911
The bodybuilder must request the Scania dealer install the original Scania power take-off on the engine.
The engine power take-off (PTO) is only available

for the F HZ chassis with engine thermostat valve
assembly on the engine.
336 910
WARNING!
1. Engine power take-off (PTO)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
262
1. Flange casing
2. Power take-off activation gear.
3. Bearing.
4. Sealing ring
5. Retaining ring.
6. Retaining ring.
8
7. Stud (x2).
8. Flange screw (x5).

4
1
7
2.
3
6
336 926
It is the bodybuilder's responsibility to fit the

hydraulic pump or the pulley to drive the compressor on the power take-off assembly.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
263
Driver area
9.1 General
General
It is important that the driver area is designed so
that the driver has an ergonomic workplace.
Instructions have been devised to suit drivers with
a height of between 1.5 and 2.0 metres.
REQUIREMENT!
Components such as the handbrake, steering

wheel, gear lever, steering column and pedal installation must be carefully protected while bodybuilding is in progress to avoid damage that could
adversely affect their functionality and service life.
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.1 General > General

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
265
9.2 Ergonomics
Driver area
The driver's field of vision (A), the area around the
hip point (B) and heel point (C) are important areas
for the design of the driver area.
Position the pedal panel as close as possible to the

front body structure (A).
313 086
313 085
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.2 Ergonomics > Driver area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
266
9.2 Ergonomics
Location of pedal panel in relation to the

floor
1.
2.
Raise the steering column casing (1).
Install the additional floor (2).
REQUIREMENT!
Add an additional wood floor as shown in the instructions below:
IMPORTANT!
1
B
You do not need to disassemble the steering system to position the additional floor.
348 706
332 057
A. 60 mm
B. Minimum 10 mm
Thickness of the additional floor must be 20 mm including the final floor covering.
REQUIREMENT!
Make sure that the steering column is centred in

the oval in the additional floor (2).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
267
9.2 Ergonomics
3.
4.
Minimum play distance.
After installing the additional floor (3) position the steering column casing (4).
5.
Make sure the mark of the rubber cover and

the sealing ring are installed in the direction of
travel of the bus.
5
4
3
348 708
348 707
A
A. Minimum 10 mm
The distance between the steering column and the

floor should be at least 10 mm for all the column
positions.
348 709
REQUIREMENT!
IMPORTANT!
REQUIREMENT!
For proper installation, the mark represented by an

arrow (5) on the rubber cover and sealing ring must
be installed in the direction of travel of the bus.
Make sure that the steering column casing (4) is

sealed over the additional floor (3) so that no air,
water or dirt can get into the driver area.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
268
9.2 Ergonomics
The finished surface of the additional floor

must comply with the measurements below.
1
Pedal plate front view.
A. 117 8 mm
A
B
341 755
331 973
6.
Flat floor:
1. Floor, including mat
A. 117 8 mm
B. Heel plate point.
C. 349 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
269
9.2 Ergonomics
Area around the pedals

REQUIREMENT!
REQUIREMENT!
The low area behind the clutch pedal must be free

of any kind of cover to allow the pedal its full
range of motion.
(Valid only for RHD chassis)
Free area that must remain around the pedals, see

figure on the right:
A. To the left of the clutch pedal: at least 110 mm.
B. To the right of the accelerator pedal: at least 30
mm.
327 281
Valid for RHD and LHD chassis.
REQUIREMENT!
The movement of the pedals must not be obstructed by adjacent components.
REQUIREMENT!
It must not be possible for outside air to flow into

the bus through the pedal panel's openings.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
270
9.2 Ergonomics
Driver's seat
As each driver's seat has its own geometry and individual characteristics, the requirements on driver
area space vary slightly depending on which driver's seat the bodybuilder chooses to use.
Each seat model has a unique hip point that is indicated on the seat model's drawing.
The specific hip point refers to a specific fixed
point on the seat.
Scania recommends that the bodybuilder follows
the drawings from the seat supplier regarding hip
point and fixed point on the specific seat.
Driver's seat positioning

Provide an ergonomic posture for both short and
tall drivers.
Short drivers must be able to declutch and

achieve full braking effect.
Tall drivers must have sufficient space for

their driving position.
Scania recommends that the bodybuilder use a
driver's seat with at least the following adjustment
range:
100 mm vertically
200 mm in length.
To determine the positioning of the seat, it must be
placed in its lowest position and as far back as possible. The hip point is marked on the drawing for
the specific seat.
The distance between the pedal panel and the hip
point should be 1,026 mm (680 mm +346 mm)
when the seat is set in its most retracted position.
See the figure on the next page.
The distance between the upper edge of the floor,
including the mat and the hip point should be 440
mm when the seat is in its lowest position.
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.2 Ergonomics > Driver's seat
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
271
9.2 Ergonomics
C
B
H
E
F
341 754
Location of the driver's seat.

1. Pedal panel
A. Hip point
B. Seat movement range
E. Heel point
F. 349 mm
G. 680 mm
H. 440 mm
Hip position marked on driver's seat.

A. Hip position
B. Fixed point
313 091
D. 100 mm
314 288
C. 200 mm
Hip point marked on driver's seat.

A. Hip position
B. Fixed point
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.2 Ergonomics > Driver's seat
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
272
9.2 Ergonomics
Instrument cluster
The instrument cluster (ICL) is fitted in the instrument panel on delivery of the chassis.
IMPORTANT!
The chassis is supplied with the instrument cluster

in the transport position, outside the ergonomic position recommended by Scania.
There are 3 alternatives for the attachment of the
instrument cluster:
1.
In the instrument panel (plastic part) that

comes with the chassis and may be used as a
component in the bus bodybuilder's instrument panel.
2. In the bracket that is supplied together with the
chassis.
3. In the bodybuilder's instrument panel.
Adjust the instrument cluster panel within the recommended dimensions in order to maintain good
ergonomics.
For further information, see the section Positioning of the Instrument cluster panel.
20
5
40
25
20
120
km/h
r/min x 100
IMPORTANT!
1/2
L
The use of the bracket 1869255 is mandatory in the

installation of the body instrument panel in order
to guarantee the correct positioning of the instrument panel cluster.
313 114
Fixed instrument panel
Ensure that the steering wheel does not obscure parts

of the instrument cluster.
Note:
The steering wheel risks obscuring parts of the instrument cluster if the recommended dimensions
are not followed.
Note:
Depending on the chassis specification, the bracket PN 1869255 can be supplied in the chassis accessory box, which guarantees that the instrument
cluster panel is fitted in the correct ergonomic position.
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.2 Ergonomics > Instrument cluster
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
273
9.2 Ergonomics
Attachment of the instrument cluster,

option 1
313 121
The instrument panel can be used by the bus bodybuilder and incorporated as part of the body panel.
313 120
The instrument panel.
Attachment points for the instrument cluster (ICL).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
274
9.2 Ergonomics
Instrument panel dimensions

2
702
A
145
187
150
68
307
344
6.5 (x8)
202
155
246
258
56
102
331 958
For more information about the dimensions of the

instrument panel supplied, contact your local Scania distributor.
1. Instrument cluster
2. Instrument panel supplied
A-A cross-section view, see figure on the right.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
275
9.2 Ergonomics

option 2
Depending on chassis specification, a bracket may

be supplied in the accompanying materials box.
The bracket ensures that the instrument cluster is

in the ergonomically correct position.
322 222
Instrument cluster fitted in the bracket included.

1. Connection frame
2. Bus bodybuilder instrument panel
4. Bracket, see the section Bracket dimensions, on the
next page
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
276
9.2 Ergonomics
Bracket dimensions - 1869255
398.5
7 (x4)
3x10
45
30
15
91
182
3x7
6xR
45
90
332 056
25.5
20
15
196
151
197
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
277
9.2 Ergonomics

option 3
If the Scania instrument panel or bracket is not

used:
322 492
Make the instrument panel so that the instrument cluster is more deeply set in the instrument panel. This prevents reflections in the
instrument cluster glass covers.
Make the instrument panel so that the instrument cluster can be removed from the front.
Instrument cluster is fitted in the instrument panel of

the bus bodybuilder.
1. Connection frame
2. Bus bodybuilder instrument panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
278
9.2 Ergonomics
Steering wheel position

The chassis is supplied with a steering column position angle of 25- 45.
The steering wheel is in the lowest parking position in the figure.
324 892
Steering wheel parking position, angle 25 -45.

1. Upper side of the pedal plate
2. Internal side of the pedal plate
3. Outer edge of the steering wheel
A. 53
B. 1
C. 320 mm
D. 109 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
279
9.2 Ergonomics
Options for position of the steering wheel
The figures show the positioning options for the

steering wheel and the instrument cluster in its ideal position.
319 482
Steering wheel driving position, angle 25 - 45.

A. 45 from horizontal line
B. 25 from horizontal line
C. 37 from vertical line, permitted adjustment +20 to
-15
D. 166 mm, permitted adjustment +40 mm to -50 mm
E. 40 mm, permitted adjustment +30 mm to -10 mm
F. The steering wheel can be adjusted 60 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
280
9.3 Instrument panel structure

Instrument panel components
The chassis is supplied with the following components installed in the transport panel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Windscreen wiper and direction indicators.

Instrument cluster menu selection.
Instrument cluster.
Switches.
Parking brake release.
Cruise control switch.
1
4
337 722
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.3 Instrument panel structure > Instrument panel components
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
281
9.4 Steering column

Transit solution for parking brake lever.
The chassis is delivered with the parking brake in
the transit position.
Left-hand side driver area - LHD
Right-hand side driver area - RHD
REQUIREMENT!
318 369
318 368
The parking brake must be removed from the transit position and mounted in the position recommended by Scania.
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.4 Steering column > Transit solution for parking brake lever.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
282
9.5 Instrument panel

Location of switches
15
Prescribed raising of
engine speed*
3
4
Empty
Empty
5
6
7
Empty
Empty
Battery master switch
312 079
The figure shows the switch location on the instrument panel. Locations based on Scania's ergonomics recommendations. Switches marked with a * in
the table are extra equipment and are not included
on all chassis.
8
9
10
11
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
12
13
14
15
Empty
Empty
Empty
ID Button reader
16
Instrument cluster control
17
White smoke limiter*
18
Exhaust brake*
19
Empty
Symbol
332 110
16
Headlamp control
Pos. Designation
312 078
23 22 21 20 19 18 17
332 141
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Symbol
312 095
Pos. Designation
312 094
4 5 6 7
312 088
2 3
312 090
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.5 Instrument panel > Location of switches
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
283
External lighting
check
21
Rear foglamp*
312 083
20
Gear selector - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
Symbol
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis is provided with

the Allison automatic gear box. The gear selector
is temporarily supplied to the left of the instrument
panel. The switch should be mounted vertically.
Place the gear selector where it is easily accessible,
preferably:
312 086
Foglamp*
23
Distance light*
Vertical gear selector.
312 085
22
To the left of the steering wheel in vehicles

with right-hand drive
To the right of the steering wheel in a vehicle
with left-hand drive
346 160
Pos. Designation
346 159
312 084
Measurements of the holes for the gear selector.

A. 5.1 mm
B 31 mm + 0.5 mm
C. 151 +0.5
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
284
Hole layouts
Scania can supply frames with space for 2 or 3
switches.
Scania recommends that the instrument panel be 4

mm + 2/-0.3 thick when installing switches and
controls.
331 993
Panel for 2 switches.

A. 57 0.3
B. 4xR8 1
B
331 991
C. 49 0.3
Instrument cluster controls.

A. 73.9 0.3
C. 67.4 0.3
331 992
B. 4xR15 1
Panel for 3 switches.

A. 57 0.3
B. 4xR8 1
C. 74 0.3
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
285
Light adjustment control
Emergency stop device
If the chassis is equipped with an emergency stop

device, the device is supplied on the left-hand side
of the instrument panel. Position the switch in such
a way that it is easily accessible by the driver.
a-a
B
C
a
D
E
313 104
Light adjustment control.

A. 2x35 0.3 mm
B. 2x13 0.3 mm
C. 62 0.5 mm
Dimensions for the installation of the emergency stop

device.
D. 107 0.3 mm
E. 114 0.5 mm
F. 54 0.3 mm
G. 7 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
286
313 119
Location of parking brake lever
There are 3 possible locations for the parking

brake control.
Parking brake lever cover.
Scania's lever bracket must be used for its installation.

The parking brake lever cover can be found in the
accessory box.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
287

Diagnostic socket
The diagnostic socket must be positioned so that
its use will not interfere during driving of the bus.
It must be possible to drive the bus safely with the
VCI (Vehicle Communication Interface) connected to the diagnostic socket.
Diagnostic socket.
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.5 Instrument panel > Diagnostic socket
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
288
REQUIREMENT!
Must be able to access the OBD socket from the

driver area for maintenance and programming of
control units.
1
REQUIREMENT!
The OBD socket must be positioned below the

lowest point of the steering wheel to the left of the
steering wheel.
REQUIREMENT!
341 763
On vehicles with a driver's door, the OBD socket

must have easy access to a person standing outside
the vehicle.
1. The graphic shows an example of positioning (1) an

OBD socket to the left of the steering wheel.
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.5 Instrument panel > Diagnostic socket
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
289

Instrument cluster dimensions
Instrument cluster dimensions.

BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.5 Instrument panel > Instrument cluster dimensions
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
290

Limitation dimensions for instrument cluster
The painted frame (E) on the instrument panel
serves as a limit for the opening of the instrument
panel.
A
B
IMPORTANT!
Adapt the instrument panel's opening so that it falls

within the painted frame's surface.
309 908
IMPORTANT!
Symbols and meter needles must be clearly visible.
A. 363 mm
B. 11 mm all around
C. 183 mm
D. Visible surface
E. Painted frame
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.5 Instrument panel > Limitation dimensions for instrument cluster
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
291
9.6 Tachograph
Location
Scania recommends that the tachograph is positioned to enable the driver to change settings etc.
when sitting in the driver's seat.
The tachograph mounting frame must be used to
install it in the instrument panel. The tachograph
mounting frame is supplied in the accessory box.
When the bus is complete, the tachograph must be

calibrated at an authorised dealer.
327 284
REQUIREMENT!
BBM F > 9 Driver area > 9.6 Tachograph > Location

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
292
Access for repairs and maintenance
10.1 Service areas, accessibility and hatches

General
The service area is defined by a service space and
a space for access. The service space (1) should be
easily accessible and free of body components. If
the floor reduces the service space, it should be
possible to remove the part of the floor which reduces the service space so that maintenance can be
performed.
1
1
359 756
The space for access (2) shows the position and

size of the inspection hatch. If any body component reduces the space provided for the inspection
hatch, it must be removable.
The figure shows examples of operational spaces and

access spaces.
359 757
The figure shows an example of a section through an

operating area.
BBM F > 10 Access for repairs and maintenance > 10.1 Service areas, accessibility and hatches > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
294
10.1 Service areas, accessibility and hatches
Examples of access to operating areas:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
359 991
Reductant tank
SCR dosing unit
Gearbox
Engine
Expansion tank
BBM F > 10 Access for repairs and maintenance > 10.1 Service areas, accessibility and hatches > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
295
10.2 Internal
Internal inspection hatches
Gearbox:
Fit inspection hatches in the body in accordance
with the measurements in the main dimension
drawings. Correctly sized hatches are a condition
for maintenance and repairs to be carried out
quickly and correctly.
The hatch sizes specified in the main dimension
drawings are the minimum required for performing maintenance satisfactorily.
For information on hatch soundproofing, see chapter 4 Floor and acoustic insulation.
REQUIREMENT!
The following components must be accessible

through internal inspection hatches. Internal hatch
covers must be water-tight and easy to remove.
External maintenance should be possible without removing the bus gear box.
It must be possible to remove the gear selector

housing without removing the gearbox.
For the automatic gearbox there should be a

quick access cover to check and top up the oil
level via the inspection cover.
Engine:
Air compressor (see also chapter on Chassis/

engine).
Injectors (see also the chapter Chassis/engine).
Thermostat housing
Hand pump and bleed nipple
Drive belt and belt tensioner.
Alternators.
Turbine
Radiator and hose connections attachment

points.
Expansion tank.
OCV (engine breather located in front of cylinder head).
Engine oil filter.

There should be a free area of at least 200 mm (A),
above the engine oil filter so that maintenance can
be performed.
351 340
REQUIREMENT!
Note:
All maintenance and the majority of repairs must

be feasible without removing the engine from the
bus.
BBM F > 10 Access for repairs and maintenance > 10.2 Internal > Internal inspection hatches
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
296
10.2 Internal
Fuel tanks:
There must be access to the fuel level sensor,

the fuel pick-up unit and electrical connections.
If the bodybuilders install their own tanks,

they must ensure that the fuel pick-up unit is
accessible.
Expansion tank
Access to the water level sensor in the lower

part of the tank.
Access to check the level through the hose of
level.
The hydraulic fluid reservoir of the hydraulic

steering system for the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis:
Ensure a free area of at least 120 mm above the

hydraulic steering fluid reservoir cap to
change the filter and fill with oil.
Emission control with reductant, SCR system:
The dosing unit for the SCR system must be

accessible.
It must be possible to pull out the reservoir level gauge from the reductant tank.
There must be an inspection hatch if the distance between the top of the reductant tank and
the components is less than 500 mm.
Fuel filter housing
347 061
The filter is installed on the left side of the engine and must be accessible for replacement
during inspection and maintenance. The filter
must be accessible by means of a cover in the
left side of the engine compartment, or from
the bonnet to the engine.
The distance between the top of the filter housing and the parts of the bodywork must be at
least 220 mm.
A. Minimum 120 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
297
10.2 Internal
APS (air processing system) including the receiver

dryer and EBS.
Air dryer.
Central electric unit located inside the bus.
Brake pedal valve.
Cooling pipe bracket (1).
Shock absorbers:
If there is no access from the lower part of the

body, a maintenance hatch should be in place.
Front cushion bolts of the engine (2).
If there is no access from the lower part of the

body, a maintenance hatch should be in place.
It should be possible to perform maintenance

of the shock absorbers in the centre and rear
axle.
Air chambers.
Clutch:
The hydraulic fluid reservoir must be accessible for the control of fluid levels.
349 858
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
298
10.3 External
External inspection hatches
REQUIREMENT!
Fit inspection hatches in the body in accordance

with the measurements in the main dimension
drawings. Correctly sized hatches are a condition
for maintenance and repairs to be carried out
quickly and correctly.
REQUIREMENT!
The following components must be accessible

through external inspection hatches:
Radiator and hose connections:
The hatch sizes specified in the main dimension

drawings are the minimum required for performing maintenance satisfactorily.
For information on hatch soundproofing, see chapter 4 Floor and noise insulation.
Hydraulic fluid reservoir of the steering system

through the front grille on the bodywork for the F
4x2 and 6x2 chassis
Ensure a free area of at least 120 mm above the

hydraulic steering fluid reservoir cap to
change the filter and fill with oil.
The inspection hatch must be large enough to

remove the radiator.
Emission control with reductant, SCR system:
The reductant agent reservoir must be removable from below or through an internal or external inspection hatch. For more information,
see Chapter 5:10 Emission control with reductant (SCR system).
The pump motor must be accessible for repair.
337 729
A. Minimum 120 mm
BBM F > 10 Access for repairs and maintenance > 10.3 External > External inspection hatches
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
299
10.3 External
The hydraulic fluid steering system coil allows it

to be moved without the need to disassemble the
connections so that radiator maintenance is performed.
Fuel tanks
Central electric unit located externally.
Ensure a free frontal area that enables the

movement of the coil as in the image below:
Must allow fuel tanks to be substituted or

maintained, if necessary.
Battery compartment.
Access to the panel studs screws in the bearings of
the front and rear suspension.
346 154
Water separator fuel filter.
Fuel filler cap.

Clutch master cylinder.
346 136
Pneumatic test connectors.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
300
10.3 External
Engine oil supply and dipstick for the 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis.
To define the access cover, the nozzle of the

engine oil dipstick and supply must be repositioned below the driver area as shown below.
Air filter cartridge.

REQUIREMENT!
Do not change the length of the nozzle and the dipstick tube.
Air filter cartridge, F NZ (LHD).

REQUIREMENT!
To replace the air filter cartridge, there must be a

minimum distance between the air filter housing
cover (1) and the other components, as shown in
the figure below.
1
2
1. Final position
2. Transport position
336 928
348 694
A. Minimum 410 mm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
301
Electrical system
11.1 General information

Chassis electrical system
When the chassis is delivered
After bus bodybuilding
Damaged cable harness
When the chassis leaves the factory for bodybuilding, most of the electrical system components are
already connected and the chassis can be driven
short distances. Not all the components are fitted in
their definitive positions, as the location of some
components depends on the design of the body.
After obtaining information on how cable harnesses and chassis components should be installed, see
chapter 11.3 Fitting chassis components.
Damage to cable harness protection covers can be

repaired by the bus bodybuilder, since the repair
guarantees protection cover functionality.
The instructions in chapter 11.3 also describe how

the temporary cable routing for the battery master
switch control must be changed before the finished
bus is delivered.
To repair the damaged protection hose:
Before bus bodybuilding

It is extremely important for the bodybuilder to
follow the instructions in chapter 2.7 Electrical
work. The chapter describes how the electrical harnesses must be disconnected and stored during
bodywork construction. Cables and connectors
must be protected while welding and grinding
work is being carried out.
Scania product liability

In accordance with applicable legislation on product liability, Scania assumes full technical liability
for its products in the chassis electrical system,
provided that the electrical system remains unchanged after the conclusion of bus bodybuilding.
Install an extra hose over the damaged protection hose.

Tape over the damage, using weather-resistant
cable tape.
REQUIREMENT!
Contact the Scania workshop if a cable harness

conductor is damaged in any way. Only a Scania
workshop should repair or replace damaged conductors.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.1 General information > Chassis electrical system
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
303

Connection to the chassis electrical system
REQUIREMENT!
Do not modify the chassis electrical system without written approval from Scania.
REQUIREMENT!
Document the electrical system for the finished

bus with electrical diagrams for the body. Enclose
them with the documents for the finished bus.
WARNING!
Many of the chassis safety systems can be knocked

out if the bodybuilder modifies the chassis electrical system. Loss of functionality could lead to personal injury.
Connections to a Scania vehicle's built-in

network
The electrical system in Scania buses is dependent
on the built-in vehicle network working correctly,
in the way that the network is tested and certified
for, in terms of braking, emission levels, EMC etc.
All connections to the vehicle network must take
place in accordance with the methods described
below.
If another type of connection is made, Scania is
neither responsible for the vehicle's traffic safety,
nor does it guarantee that the vehicle is in compliance with international and local environmental
legislation with respect to emission levels, for example.
Scania reserves the right to waive any responsibility for accidents, failures and/or damages arising
from deficient and unauthorized electrical connections.
External connections to the vehicle network's

CAN bus must be made as follows:
1.
CAN for bodywork equipment is connected to

the BCI via the designated connection to the
external CAN bus. For more information, see
Chapter 11.6 Communication between chassis
and body.
2. External FMS are connected via the designated interface, FMS Gateway (RTG). For more
information, see Chapter 11.6 Communication
between chassis and body.
3. SDP3 is used for troubleshooting and repairs
via the designated interface, VCI. Connections
must be of a temporary nature.
4. Tools for legislated emission diagnosis are
connected to the designated diagnostic connector. Connections must be of a temporary
nature.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.1 General information > Connection to the chassis electrical system
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
304
Connection points of individual functions
CAN network connection points
To use technology with discrete signals, there are

several contacts where each function has its own
pin, see Chapter 11.7 Connection points for the
bodybuilder.
The body network can be connected to the chassis

through high and low CAN connectors. For more
information, see Chapter 11.6 Communication between chassis and body, and Chapter 11.8 Bodywork connections via CAN.
IMPORTANT!
Use the connection points shown in the manual. Incorrect connection may cause overload, damaging
the electrical system with loss of functionality.
1
2
346 177
1. Individual functions.
2. CAN network connection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
305
Connectors
REQUIREMENT!
Only connect the recommended number of lights,

direction indicators, and windscreen wipers directly on the chassis electrical interfaces. The functions may not work if their respective circuits are
loaded beyond the intended level.
The electrical panel connector must be of type TE

/ MCP.
For more information, see Chapter 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder.
Note:
If it is necessary to connect a greater load than

specified, the component must be controlled by an
extra relay.
Design the electrical system so that a function is
only energised when it needs to be activated.
The figure shows an example of TE / MPC electrical
panel connectors.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
306

Cable harnesses
The chassis cable harnesses can be divided into six
different areas:
electrical panel
instrument panel
front module
centre module
rear module
battery box
Electrical cable area (mm)

Use the appropriate fuse and electrical cable when
connecting electrical loads; see the table below.
Cable length less than 10 m.
Load
Fuse
< 3.1 A
3.2 A - 4.7 A
4.8 A - 6.2 A
6.3 A - 12.5 A
12.6 A - 18.7 A
5A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
30 A
0.75 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.5 mm
6.0 mm
Load
Fuse
< 3.1 A
3.2 A - 4.7 A
4.8 A - 6.2 A
6.3 A - 12.5 A
12.6 A - 18.7 A
5A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
30 A
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.5 mm
6.0 mm
10.0 mm
Cable length over 10m.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.1 General information > Cable harnesses
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
307

Electromagnetic interference
To reduce electromagnetic interference all cable
routing should be done as close as possible to a
metal surface or through a metal channel set into
the chassis. This is very important in terms of the
battery cable. Any remaining cable harness should
be repositioned and reassembled on the chassis to
the greatest extent possible.
REQUIREMENT!
The bodywork electrical system must meet applicable national requirements concerning electromagnetic interference.
EU requirements
From 1996, all vehicles must meet the requirements of directive 95/54/EC relating to electromagnetic interference.
Scania tests all systems mounted on chassis in accordance with Scania's own requirement, which is
more demanding than EU requirements. The EU
requirement is 30 volts/metre.
Only connect chassis electrical system equipment
at the points specified in Chapter 11.4 Power supply. Only connect equipment that complies with
the requirements in the instructions of EU Directive 95/54/EC. Scania recommends that components are in compliance with attachments 4 and 7
related to broadband interference.
Incorrectly positioned equipment may interfere
with chassis electronic system functionality and
the security system.
Do not wrap excess cable harnesses. Coils of wire
harness can cause electromagnetic interference.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.1 General information > Electromagnetic interference
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
308

Fire risk
REQUIREMENT!
Cable harnesses and battery cables must be fixed.

Protect wire harnesses and battery cables so they
are not exposed to abrasion and friction. This is especially important if chassis cable channels are not
used.
Cable grommet holes should be sized so that connectors can be directed by them. Seal the holes
carefully with fireproof putty.
Never attach electrical wires alongside hydraulic
hoses (pressure line) or fuel due to fire risk.
REQUIREMENT!
Secure the cable harness to avoid friction with

chassis and bodywork parts. Electrical wires exposed to friction can pose a fire hazard.
For more information, see section Cable harness

installation in this chapter.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.1 General information > Fire risk
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
309

Alternator charging capacity
Depending on the configuration, the chassis can be
supplied with one or two alternators:
2/3 of the alternator charging capacity corresponds

to fields 1 and 2 in the diagram below.
The alternator's charging capacity is divided into

Chassis current consumption.
2. Available continuous current consumption.
3. Temporary current consumption.
Scale the charge of electrical equipment in the

bodywork, respecting the charging capacity available for the chassis.
250
200
150
100
For more information about scaling electrical

equipment charges of the bodywork, see attachment "Example of checking alternator charging
capacity for the K-chassis"in Chapter 14 Attachment, BBM via SAIL.
240 0
312 854
220 0
140 0
120 0
100 0
200 0
0
80 0
The chassis must be fitted with two 100A alternators if the vehicle is equipped with air conditioning.
50
60 0
REQUIREMENT!
180 0
Note:
1.
160 0
Charging capacity 1 x 100A, 51A (during

idling).
Charging capacity 2 x 100A, 102A (during
idling).
A. Ampere
B. rpm
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.1 General information > Alternator charging capacity
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
310
Extra alternator
If the continuous consumption charges of the bodywork exceeds 2/3, the bodybuilder must install an
extra alternator as per the suggested wiring diagram.
3
C690
4
C690
REQUIREMENT!
30
Connect the extra alternator directly to the Air

Conditioning system (Battery less). Connecting
the extra alternator to the chassis electrical system
is prohibited.
87
30
86
87a
85
87
R x1
86
87a
85
R x2
AC Unit
317 610
Extra alternator wiring diagram.
Component code
Component
description
G
R
Generator (Alternator)
Relays
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.1 General information > Alternator charging capacity
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
311
11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery

Electrical system controls
The electrical system is comprised of various control units which communicate over a common network. To check the location on the chassis, refer to
the following page.
SMS (Suspension Management System)
SMS/ELC (Electronic Level Control), control

unit for electronic adjustment of the chassis
height. Available only for 6x2 and 8x2 chassis
F (F bi-articulated).
BMS (Brake Management System)
BMS/ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), function of anti-lock brakes.

BCS (Bus Chassis System)
BCS, control unit that provides contact between the chassis electrical system (via CAN
or discrete signal) and the bodywork electrical
system. Valid for F 8x2 chassis ("F bi-articulated").
BWE (Bodywork electrical system)
BWE / BCI (Bodywork Communication Interface) control unit that communicates between
the chassis electrical system (via CAN or separate signal) and the bodywork electrical system. Valid for F 4x2 and 6x2 chassis.
TCO (Tachograph).
RTC (Road Traffic Communicator)
RTC/C200 (Scania Communicator 200), remote communication control unit.

E500 Speed Signal Amplifier.
VIS (Visibility system)
ACS (Articulation Control System), control unit

for articulation system (8x2 "F bi-articulated").
GMS (Gearbox Management System), control unit
for the gearbox system.
GMS/MAN (Manual Gearbox)

GMS/GA, control unit for the Allison automatic gear box management system.
VIS/CUV (Control Unit Visibility) control

unit for most of the functions related to field of
vision and visibility.
COO (Coordinator), gateway to the chassis CAN
network and driver area interface.
ICL (Instrument Cluster), instruments combined
on the instrument panel. Displays vehicle information to the driver.
APS (Air Processing System), control unit for
components included in the supply circuit for the
compressed air system.
EMS (Engine Management System), control unit
for the engine control system.
SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction), control unit
for emissions control with reducing agent.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Electrical system controls
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
312
The figure shows the system and control unit positioning for the F 4x2 and F 6x2 chassis.
RTC BMS
TCO/VDR
BWE
VIS
SMS
GMS
APS
SCR
COO ICL
EMS
349 851
SCR
Control system and positioning of the control units in

the electrical system.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
313
The figure shows the system and control unit positioning for the F 8x2 chassis ("F bi-articulated").
BCS
TCO
BMS
VIS
SMS
E500
RTC
ACS
SMS
APS
GMS
CENTRAL
ELECTRIC
UNIT
COO
ICL
EMS
349 843
SCR
Control system and positioning of the control units in

the electrical system.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
314
On delivery of the chassis, all control units, with

the exception of: Scania Communicator 200 (1)
and tachograph (2), are permanently mounted on
the control panel. The tachograph and the Scania
Communicator 200 must be positioned permanently in the main electrical compartment by the bodybuilder.
REQUIREMENT!
The instrument cluster must be removed during

bodybuilding. Other control units must not be removed during bodybuilding. Electrical panel units
can not be removed from the board.
1
REQUIREMENT!
349 844
All electrical components are unique to the chassis, and must therefore be identified and reinstalled
in their respective chassis during bodybuilding.
Tachograph transportation positioning in the electrical

panel.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
315

Location of the chassis electrical panel
The electrical harness supplied for the electrical
panel is temporarily fixed to the chassis during
transit.
348 696
1. Transport position of the power unit for F 4x2 and

6x2 chassis
2. Transport position of the power unit for 8x2 chassis
(F bi-articulated)
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Location of the chassis electrical panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
316
Electrical panel dimensions
D
E
349 846
I
Valid for F 4x2 and 6x2
I. 146 mm
F
G
A. 655 mm
B. 475 mm
Template for electrical panel.

C. 532 mm
D. 16 mm
K
349 845
344 062
349 854
Valid for F 8x2 (F bi-articulated).

J. 170 mm
K. 120 mm
E. 165 mm
F. 264 mm
G. 290 mm
J. 4 holes with 7 mm diameter
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Location of the chassis electrical panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
317

Battery box
346 180
At chassis delivery, the batteries, two main fuses

(1 x 100A + 1 x 30A) and the master switch are located in the transport box (1).
Both batteries are 12V and connected in series so

that the electrical system voltage is 24V.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Battery box
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
318

Master switch
In transport mode the battery master switch is
placed in a wooden box in the chassis frame and
can be supplied with two configurations described
below:
Main relay (R500)
Mechanical master switch (S40)
In this case, the battery master switch is deactivated when the starter key is switched off.
The mechanical battery master switch can be accessed on the lower part of the wooden box.
In this case, when the engine is turned off using the
starter key, the mechanical battery master switch
must also be deactivated manually; otherwise the
batteries may discharge too soon.
Electric battery master switch.
Mechanical battery master switch.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Master switch
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
319

Chassis cable harnesses
The chassis are provided with all cable harnesses
in transportation position, already appropriate for a
finished bus. The cable harnesses move from
transport position to the electrical panel for:
front module chassis components

centre module chassis components
rear module chassis components
battery box components
Cable harness for front module chassis

The front module cable harness measures seven
metres from the first permanent attachment point.
Use the space to install the power unit in its final
position.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Chassis cable harnesses
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
320
348 715
The cable harnesses for the centre module are delivered in transport position with a space of 4 metres between lashing points.
Rear module cable harnesses are delivered in

transport position with a space of 3 metres between
the lashing points of the articulation unit axle, and
a space of 6 metres between the lashing points of
the rear chassis axle.
Battery box cable harness

The battery master switch cable harness allows up
to a 5 metre cabling between the master switch and
the electrical panel.
After bodywork assembly, the cable harnesses
must be reinstalled and any surplus regrouped in
order not to suffer from wear or become coiled.
348 716
Centre and rear module cable harness for

BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Chassis cable harnesses
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
321

Chassis ground points
The chassis is delivered with a permanent ground
point (1) on the front module.
For the chassis electrical system to work, ground
points must be electrically interconnected. For
more information, see Chapter 11.5 Grounding, in
the section Bodywork grounding.
REQUIREMENT!
Battery grounding must be performed using the

permanent grounding point (1) of the chassis.
348 695
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.2 Chassis equipment on delivery > Chassis ground points
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
322
11.3 Chassis component assembly

Batteries
Batteries must be mounted in a compartment protected from dust, snow, water and any components
that may damage them by impact.
REQUIREMENT!
Batteries should be positioned on a flat base made

of wood, fibre or rubber.
REQUIREMENT!
The battery compartment must have an opening for

ventilation.
REQUIREMENT!
There should be drainage holes at the lower part of

the compartment.
REQUIREMENT!
The inside temperature of the battery compartment

must be between -40 and +40 C as not to affect
their useful life.
REQUIREMENT!
For fire safety reasons, it is absolutely essential to

protect the positive battery cable from physical
damage.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not position batteries close to heat sources such

as exhaust pipes, radiator, engine, or gearbox.
The opening should be at the highest part of the

compartment, to prevent any accumulation of explosive gas.
346 181
REQUIREMENT!
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Batteries
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
323
Fitting the batteries and associated

equipment
WARNING!
Battery and cable terminals are tapered. Be careful

not to fit them reversed.
311 809
Connect the cable and battery terminals. Always leave the earth cable (negative terminal)
to last. Do this with hand tools as impact tools
may damage cable and battery terminals.
2. Tighten the nuts on the battery terminals carefully with 10 Nm. If the nuts are too tight, the
battery terminals could become deformed.
3. Reinstall the plastic protectors on the terminals.
311 810
1.
Correctly tightened nut.
Incorrectly tightened nut.
A. Tightening torque 10 Nm
Deformed battery cable terminal.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Batteries
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
324

2
1
For information about bodywork connections with

a battery master switch, see Chapter 11.4 Power
supply.
3
4
Positioning of the switch for the battery

master switch
9 489
For more information, see chapter 9.5 Instrument

panel, in the section about positioning of switches.
349 857
REQUIREMENT!
Place the battery master switch near the batteries.

The battery master switch must be protected
against dirt and be accessible for maintenance.
REQUIREMENT!
The cable harness must be connected to the battery

master switch, as per the figure.
Place the switch on the instrument panel. On chassis delivery, the switch is positioned on the instrument panel for transportation.
Bracket for battery master switch.

1. Main fuse 30 for chassis (100 A) F500.
2. Connector for the battery master switch signal cable.
3. Connection point for the the battery positive cable
and main fuse B+ F501 sleeve and main fuse CUV
(F565) socket.
4. Connection point of the starter motor and the rear
junction box and the main fuse 30 sleeve.
5. Main fuse B+ for CUV (100 A) F565.
6. Main fuse B + for chassis (30 A) F501.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Battery master switch
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
325
Types of battery master switches

There are three different types of battery master
switch drives:
S500 switch of the battery master switch
Mechanic Knob switch of the battery

master switch
Manual (S40) battery master switch
If the client has opted for this type of Knob switch,

the same is supplied inside the accessory box.
If the client has opted for this type of S40 manual

switch, the same is supplied installed in the battery
box (used in the chassis transport).
S500 switch for battery master switch
Mechanic Knob switch of the battery master switch.
The bodybuilder must install it in an easily accessible location of the driver area, but not exposed.
339 623
312 079
349 836
The S500 control switch is supplied installed on

the chassis transit instrument panel. The bodybuilder must fit the S500 control switch onto the
bus instrument panel (see also Chapter 9.4 Instrument Panel).
Manual battery master switch (S40)
This switch must be connected to the C693-11 and

C693-12 connectors, so an electric harness with
appropriate dimensions must be built by the bodybuilder. If this control switch has to be positioned
externally, it must be protected against dirt and
moisture.
For more information, see Chapter 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
326
Manual (S40) battery master switch

Wiring diagram for manual master switch (S40).
REQUIREMENT!
The manual master switch (S40) should be mounted in the final battery compartment.
C710
339 625
F500
IMPORTANT!
The manual master switch (S40), must not be

turned off with the engine running, as this will
cause damage to the alternator.
The manual master switch (S40), must not be
turned off with the starter key on, as this will generate error codes in the electrical system.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
327

Electrical panel
The electrical panel is delivered with transport
brackets.
REQUIREMENT!
REQUIREMENT!
Remove the transport bracket (1). Do not use the

transport bracket to install the electrical panel in
the final position.
When identifying the electrical panel during dismantling from the chassis, it must match the number stamped into the chassis.
REQUIREMENT!
Make sure that the batteries are not connected

when connecting the electrical panel.
349 852
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Electrical panel
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
328
REQUIREMENT!
Position the electrical panel so that it is protected

against moisture and dirt, that it is easily accessible
for maintenance and that none of the connectors
are pointing up.
REQUIREMENT!
364 231
The electrical panel must be protected against falling baggage, loads, impact or mechanical shock.
Permitted and prohibited electrical panel locations.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
329
Reconnect the cable harnesses to the

electrical panel
Use the hexagonal socket tool, as shown below, to

fit the nuts (1), (3) and (4) of the electrical panel in
order to prevent their plastic coating being damaged.
Reconnect the cable harnesses between the battery

and the electrical panel. Reconnect the earth cable
between the electrical panel and the front module
chassis ground point.
C650
For nuts (3) and (4) use a 13 mm socket, and for nut (1)
use a 17 mm socket.
C652
C640
C632
C670
C680
C610
C6 5 0
344 055
C601
C602
C603
349 853
2
3
4
5
C651
344 063
REQUIREMENT!
The power unit and cable harness connectors are

identified by the component number. Make sure
that connectors are not reversed during assembly.
Reversed connectors may cause damage or malfunction of the electrical system.
1. Voltage supply 30
2. Ground
3. Voltage feed B+
4. CUV F565 power supply
5. Connector C610
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
330

Cable harness
Excess electrical cables
REQUIREMENT!
Protect cable harnesses during welding, drilling

and grinding.
REQUIREMENT!
If the wiring harness does not have thermal protection, the distance should be:
REQUIREMENT!
Do not attach the cable harness to moving objects

that may cause wear.
Minimum 100mm between the wiring harness

and the exhaust system after the silencer (2).
Minimum 60mm between the wiring harness
and the coolant pipe.
Minimum 40mm between the cable harnesses
and the air conditioning vent.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not wrap excess electrical cables as this can

cause electromagnetic interference. Secure them
tightly in a suitable place on the chassis or bodywork.
REQUIREMENT!
1
325 742
Never attach electrical wires along with hydraulic

lines (line pressure) or fuel due to fire risk. The
minimum recommended distance is 40mm.
REQUIREMENT!
Harnesses in the turbine area after the silencer (1)

must be at a minimum distance of 200 mm and
protected with a deflector plate.
348 712
2
REQUIREMENT!
Make sure that no excess electrical cables are positioned on moving parts near the front and rear axles.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Cable harness
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
331
Driver area
REQUIREMENT!
Grommet holes, for example on the wall between

the engine compartment and the driver area, must
be sized so that connectors may pass through them,
enabling the exchange of an electrical cable harness.
349 855
Seal the holes carefully with fireproof putty to prevent heat and noise being passed to the driver's
compartment.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
332
Preparing the chassis for installation of

electrical cables
Clean the areas where the electrical wires will

be routed to prevent them from being damaged.
Install the electrical cables in the brackets.

Secure the battery cable firmly and protect it from
friction and mechanical damage. A damaged battery cable means increased fire risk.
500
mm
60 mm
100 mm
IMPORTANT!
348 713
The distance between clamps for pipes, hoses, and

chassis cable harnesses can not be more than
500mm.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
333

Cable harnesses in the driver area
Cable harnesses and other electrical components
near the driver area must be located and fitted so
they do not come in contact with the steering column, regardless of the driving position of pedal
mechanism.
REQUIREMENT!
Scania recommends that the steering wheel support and cable harnesses next to the driver area remain in their places during bodybuilding.
314 279
Secure the cable harnesses near the driver area, in

such way they will not be exposed to friction or
wear.
1. Cable harness attachment points for the steering column; note marking with yellow tape
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Cable harnesses in the driver area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
334
REQUIREMENT!
The cable harnesses must be positioned to the left

of the steering wheel support.
A
2
1
1. Cable harness attachment points for the coordinator

2. Cable harness attachment point for the steering column; note marking with yellow tape
314 280
314 278
Cross section A-A
3. Cable harness
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Cable harnesses in the driver area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
335

Cable harness for articulated bus articulation
For more information on routing and fitting cable

harnesses in the articulation area, see Chapter 3.16
Clamping and installation of electrical cables,
pipes and hoses.
346 182
All cable lengths are adapted to bodybuilding and

should not be extended. Route cable harnesses and
compressed air pipes via the original articulation
chassis brackets.
Routing of electrical cable harnesses for 8x2 chassis (F

bi-articulated).
The articulation unit allows for a maximum articulation angle of 54. Cable harnesses installed must
be flexible to follow articulation movement and
clamped in such a way they do not suffer wear and
friction.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Cable harness for articulated bus articulation
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
336

Scania Communicator 200 (C200)
Control unit.
Antenna
The control unit and cable harness are fitted in the

electrical panel in the transit position. A 1.8m coaxial cable is supplied inside the chassis accessory
box and depending on chassis configuration, one
or two extra 5.8m coaxial cable.
The antenna is provided within the chassis accessory box. The dimensions of the antenna above the
roof are 100 x 66 x 19 mm.
Install the control unit next to the electrical

panel, in a dry, dust free area.
Do not splice cable harnesses or coaxial cables.
Control unit connectors must not be pointed
upward.
Use the 1.8 m long coaxial cable if the control
unit and the antenna are positioned next to
each other, or if not, use the 5.8 m and 1.8 m
coaxial cables interconnected.
If you use the coaxial cables connected to each
other, place the connectors in a dry, dust-free
area that is accessible for maintenance.
REQUIREMENT!
If the coaxial cable is curved, the radius of the curvature must be at least 50 mm.
Fit the antenna on the roof so that the inclination of
the antenna is less than 20, see figure.
325 734
REQUIREMENT!
Note:
The antenna should not be treated with any type of

paint or anti-corrosive protection.
Antenna positioning.
A. >20
REQUIREMENT!
The distance to other antennas and external metal

objects must be at least 300 mm.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Scania Communicator 200 (C200)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
337
Antenna installation and ground

connection
1.
Make a hole in the roof with a diameter of 20

0/-1 mm.
2. Fasten the antenna with a tightening torque of
5 1 Nm.
IMPORTANT!
Tighten the nut without securing the coaxial cable.
Tighten the antenna in a ground plane.

REQUIREMENT!
The nut that fits the antenna must have electrical

contact with the ground plane. Remove any surface treatment agent in the part of the ground connection level which has electrical contact with the
nut.
If the bus roof is metal, the roof may function as
the ground plane. If the roof is plastic, a metal
ground connection plane must be placed under the
roof. The diameter of the ground connection plane
Arrangement of the telephone and twoway radio coaxial cables

Place the radio antenna in the metal covered part of
the roof to obtain a ground plane. This position
provides the best emission range. The metal surface also serves to isolate the antenna from other
cables placed in the roof.
Do not route coaxial cables together with other cables. However, the coaxials may intersect with other cables without risk of electromagnetic
interference.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Scania Communicator 200 (C200)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
338

Horn electrical connection
Extra horn
Use the contact housing (1), the cable terminal (2),

the seal (3) and the contact housing boot (4) to connect the horn (5). They are all delivered in the accessory box provided on the chassis.
To install the extra horn, the bodybuilder must

make a harness that allows selection between the
main horn (1) and the extra horn (2), as per the circuit suggested below.
5
3
For more information, see chapter 6.3 Compressed

air system components.
10
332 122
After fitting, the horn must be certified by the bus

bodybuilder in respect of noise level and location.
7
1
6
C694
20
C501
S28
1. Contact housing
346 183
Ground one of the horn terminals and connect the

other to the bus bodybuilder interface, see Chapter
11.7 (C694-6).
2. Electrical cable terminal

3. Connector sealing
4. Protection hood
5. Horn contact housing
For more information see Chapter 11.7 (C694-6).

Note:
The bodybuilder can use its own switch, however,

depending on chassis configuration, the S28
switch is delivered inside the material box.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Horn electrical connection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
339

Remote vehicle immobiliser
Depending on the specification, the chassis can be

equipped with a remotely controlled vehicle immobilisation function. Upon chassis delivery, the
control unit is electrically connected and secured
to a bracket attached to the instrument panel. The
bracket does not need to be used for final positioning of the control unit.
Note:
The chassis can only be driven when the control

unit is electrically connected.
REQUIREMENT!
The control unit is chassis-specific. Do not mix the

control units.
Fitting the control unit

REQUIREMENT!
Position the control unit in the vehicle so that it is

difficult to access. However, it should be positioned in such a way that the antenna signal is not
impaired.
The control unit can be positioned under the instrument panel, for example. Do not locate a control
unit below a metal instrument panel or metal roof.
The antenna is built into the control unit and the
surrounding metal can degrade the antenna's reception. The electrical cable to the control unit is 5
metres long.
The control unit can have a maximum inclination
of 30, see figure. The antenna must be pointing
upward and the control unit must therefore not be
fitted upside down.
MAX 30
309 139
Transport fitting
Control unit with bracket. The antenna is integrated

into the control unit. The control unit dimensions, without bracket, are 103x76x26 mm.
REQUIREMENT!
Test antenna reception with a diagnostic tool after

the final positioning of the control unit.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Remote vehicle immobiliser
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
340

Fuses and relays
Fuses in the chassis electrical system are located
on the electrical panel and the battery master
switch. Relays in the chassis electrical system are
located on the central electric unit on the electrical
panel.
Electrical panel
The main fuses for chassis F500 (1) and F565 (2)
are located on the battery master switch bracket.
Fuses and relays are located on the chassis electrical panel.
IMPORTANT!
Turn off the power when changing a fuse.
Fuses
Size
Circuit
F500
F565
100 A
100 A
F501
30 A
Voltage supply 30
Power supply B+
(CUV)
Voltage feed B+
337 750
344 058
For information about fuse and relay locations on

the central electric unit (1), see figure on next page.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Fuses and relays
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
341

Circuit board
Function
R19
R20
R21
R46
R501
R660
R661
R662
R663
Alternator, supply 61
Voltage 15 activated
Positioning light bulbs
Fuel heater
SCR
Relay timer
SCR heat
SCR heat
344 059
Relays
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Circuit board
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
342
Fuse
Size
Circuit
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
10 A
5A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
ICL, Instrument cluster

TCO: tachograph
EMS, engine management system
SCR
SCR heat
SCR heat
ACS 1, articulation control system
ACS 2/RDL, articulation control system
BMS: brake management system
BMS: brake management system
15 voltage, checking
OBD on board diagnosis system
COO, coordinator
DIS
SMS, suspension management system
SMS, articulated, suspension management system
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
343
Fuse
Size
Circuit
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
10 A
10 A
5A
10 A
5A
5A
10 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
F32
10 A
F33
10 A
F34
20 A
Left position lamp

Right position lamp
VIS light module. Light button
Direction, main power switch
Activate, bus CAN red
Activate, bus CAN yellow/green
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare/BWE
Spare/BWE
Power supply to the bodywork electrical system, supply
30
15
61
Spare
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
344
Fuse
Size
Circuit
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
F44
10 A
5A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
5A
20 A
10 A
30 A
Start/stop, rear module, connector C502

Tag axle energy source
APS, compressed air supply
TPM, tire pressure monitoring
RTC, yellow CAN bus node
EM, air flap
Control, fuel heater
Fuel heater
GMS, gearbox management system
GMS, clutch (actuator)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
345
Fuse relay plate

A fuse and relay label is provided in the chassis accompanying materials box. The label shows the
system to which the fuses belong and their sizes.
The label also shows to which circuit the relays belong.
F0 1 F0 2 F0 3 F0 4 F0 5 F0 6 F0 7 F0 8 F0 9 F1 0 F1 1 F1 2 F1 3 F1 4 F1 5 F1 6 F1 7 F1 8 F1 9 F2 0 F2 1 F2 2
10 A 5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 10 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 5 A 10 A
R66 0
R66 2
R66 3
R50 1
R2 0
R1 9
R2 1
R4 6
REQUIREMENT!
Cut the right corner of the label (1) and install it

next to the battery master switch.
REQUIREMENT!
Place fuse and relay labels next to the electrical

panel.
R66 1
F2 3 F2 4 F2 5 F2 6 F2 7 F2 8 F2 9 F3 0 F3 1 F3 2 F3 3 F34 F3 5 F3 6 F3 7 F3 8 F3 9 F4 0 F4 1 F4 2 F4 3 F4 4
5A
5 A 10 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 20A 10 A 5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 5 A 20 A 10 A 30 A
F50 0
F50 1
F56 5
30 A
80 A
1
356 666
100 A
R50 0
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
346

Weight Control System (WCS) - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
The Scania WCS is a device with the primary purpose to provide real-time vehicle load distribution.
In the event an excessive load is detected, it sends
signals to trigger light and sound warnings.
The load distribution calculation is made through a

reading of air chamber pressures.
Install the WCS module anywhere in the grey area.
Connect the end of the WCS module harness

to the end of the E2504 connector located near
the ICL.
Install the WCS module on the instrument
panel for easy driver visibility.
347 055
REQUIREMENT!
347 056
The WCS module (1) and a 1 m cable harness are

delivered inside the material box.
A. 67 mm
B. 97.5 mm
C. 67 mm
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.3 Chassis component assembly > Weight Control System (WCS) - 8x2 (F bi-articulated)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
347
11.4 Power supply

General
Note:
Scale the electrical equipment in the bodywork according to the alternator charging capacity.
For more information about the alternator charging
capacity, see Chapter 11.1 General information Alternator charging capacity.
Note:
The maximum permitted current connected to B+

is 200 mA. The chassis consumes 50 mA and the
bodywork can not use more than 150 mA. This is
necessary to preserve battery life and to ensure the
vehicle can be started after some days with the engine turned off.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.4 Power supply > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
348
11.4 Power supply

Current consumers
Major current consumers
Small current consumers
Major current consumers are electrical components that individually consume more than 50A,
such as the climate system, microwave oven,
among others.
Connect current consumers that together use less

than 150 mA, to power supply B+ on the electrical
panel, see Fig. The radio and clock memory is an
example of current consumers that together use
less than 150 mA.
Attach large current consumers in such a way they

only work when the engine is running and the alternators are charging.
Power supply with consumption

exceeding 150 mA connected to B+
Only components with a timed system and automatic shutdown for low battery voltage can be
connected to B+.
344 078
Connect current consumers that use more than 5A,

such as the auxiliary heater, to the bodywork electrical panel. The auxiliary heater can not work for
more than two hours at a time. The auxiliary heater
can not be connected to the chassis electrical panel
because it consumes a lot of energy.
Power source B+ Block (positive terminal block).
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.4 Power supply > Current consumers
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
349
11.4 Power supply
Electrical panel power cable of the

bodybuilder
REQUIREMENT!
Protect all bodywork power cables connected to

the chassis master switch with fuses.
IMPORTANT!
The bodywork's electrical panel should be mounted on an appropriately grounded metal plate or
should have a ground connection. We recommend
that the grounding cable length does not exceed
300 mm.
WARNING!
The bodybuilder should perform functional tests

before delivery of the bus to the customer, ensuring that electrical harnesses are correctly installed.
This applies to safety functions in particular.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
350
11.4 Power supply
Connection to battery feed

The bodywork power supply must be connected to
the battery master switch (2) at a bodybuilder fuse
base as close to the battery master switch as possible.
2
1
3
4
5
The tightening torque of screw 30 (2) and B+ (3)

should be 17.5 3 Nm.
349 857
6
Bracket for battery master switch.
1. Main fuse 30 for chassis (100 A) F500.
Mechanical battery master switch (S40)

1. Chassis - Main fuse 30
2. Connector for the battery master switch signal cable.
2. For bodybuilder's major current consumers - Power

supply 30.
3. Connection point for the the battery positive cable

and fuse B+ F501 sleeve and main fuse CUV (F565)
socket.
3. For bodybuilder's minor current consumers - Power

supply B+
4. Connection point of the starter motor and the rear

junction box and the main fuse 30 sleeve.
4. Chassis - Main fuse B+.
5. Main fuse B+ for CUV (100 A) F565.

6. Main fuse B + for chassis (30 A) F501.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
351
11.4 Power supply
Connection to positive terminal block
IMPORTANT!
The main power consuming devices, such as A/C

installation, must be connected to a positive terminal block (junction box) located on the left side
member near the gearbox.
Seal all junction box connections.
During linkage, the nuts must be tightened to a

torque of 33 3 N.m, with a low rotation tightening machine (maximum 200 rpm).
This junction point is separated from the battery by
the battery master switch, and has no current when
the master switch is off.
REQUIREMENT!
1. Junction box located on the left side member
Connect major current consumers like the AC system directly to the junction box, protecting them
with fuses.
Note:
This connection can only be used respecting the 2/

3 alternator charge rule. For more information, see
chapter 11.1 General information.
Junction box.
1. For the starter motor, 2 x 50 mm.
2. Battery master switch power supply
3. Connections for major current consumers must be
tightened to 33 3 Nm
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
352
11.5 Grounding
General
Bodywork grounding
Note:
Additional bodywork grounding is not required if

the bodywork is welded to the chassis.
The grounding must be of good quality and sufficient to support the current peaks and surges at the
time of engine ignition.
Ground the bodywork in the chassis if the bodywork is bolted to the chassis. The distance between
the bodywork ground point and the chassis ground
point must be the shortest possible.
Creating a ground point:
1.
Weld a M10 screw to the bodywork and install

a locknut to serve as the contact base of the cable terminal.
2. Connect one end of the grounding cable to the
welded screw and the other end to the permanent ground screw of the chassis.
3. After fitting the cable, perform an anti-rust
treatment.
All the screwed unions of the bodywork must be
grounded to each other. Create and connect the
bodywork ground points to each other so that the
entire vehicle becomes a grounded unit.
Grounding of the bodywork current

consumers
Connect the bodywork current consumers to the
common bodywork groundpoint, as this facilitates
fault diagnosis during repair and maintenance of
completed vehicles.
If the bodywork is screwed to the chassis, the central ground point must be connected to a permanent chassis ground point with a grounding cable.
Size the grounding cable according to the voltage
requirements for the bodywork current consumers.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.5 Grounding > General

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
353
11.5 Grounding
Permanent grounding screw
The tightening torque of the self-locking M10

flange nut M10should be 30 3 Nm and the torque
for checking 15 Nm.
IMPORTANT!
317 624
Use a torque wrench or impact nut runner calibrated with the torque above and with a low rotation
speed (maximum 70 rpm). Do not tighten the nut
with an impact screwdriver.
1. Flange nut M12

2. Flange nut M10
Note:
Insulate the permanent grounding screw when

painting.
The permanent grounding screw has a M10 thread

to allow the cable connection.
IMPORTANT!
REQUIREMENT!
Always use a self-locking M10 (2) flange nut

to connect the grounding cable.
Never release the M12 (1) flange nut.
Never recap a screw already installed.
Scania provides the engine properly grounded to

the chassis, if the grounding of the engine has been
interrupted, the electrical current can reach with
peaks and lows to the permanent ground point,
with a risk of fire or damage to the components.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
354
11.5 Grounding
Additional permanent grounding screw

Use the additional screw in the chassis accessory
box if the permanent grounding screw installed on
the chassis is not sufficient.
A M12 (1) flange nut, permanent grounding screw
(2) and M10 (3) flange nut are supplied in the chassis accessory box.
A
339 629
Make a new hole in the chassis with a diameter of

14.2 mm, with a tolerance of -0.05 mm + 0.1 mm.
The hole must be free from paint, rust and dust. For
rules on new holes see chapter 3.5 Drilling.
The distance (A) between the flange of the permanent grounding screw (2) and the chassis (1) must
be less than 0.2 mm.
Distance A must not be less than 0.2 mm.
318 324
Attachment of the extra ground connection screw.
Use a M12 (1) flange nut to lock the permanent

grounding screw, tightening torque of 45 5 Nm.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
355
11.6 Communication between chassis and body

General
Communication between chassis and body can
take place via CAN or through a discrete interface.
In both cases, the recommended location of the
electrical panel connection must be used.
Functionality
Regardless of communication method used, the
communication comprises:
Chassis information signals. For example,

parking brake engaged.
Control signals to activate chassis functionality. For example, enabling bus stop brake;
In order for a function to work, defined information and control signals communicating via CAN
or discrete interface are required.
For more information about functions, see User
function in Chapter 14 Attachment, in the BBM
via SAIL.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.6 Communication between chassis and body > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
356
REQUIREMENT!
Only use connection points as described in the

BBM.
REQUIREMENT!
Connect the bodywork electrical system to the

chassis as described in the BBM.
IMPORTANT!
The chassis electrical systems are built for peaks of

up to 150 volts.
IMPORTANT!
Chassis control units support a maximum of 32

volts.
REQUIREMENT!
Protect bodywork components from power surges.

Information about protection against voltage surges can be obtained from component suppliers.
Components without this protection are not permissible, except when used together with damping
components such as varistors and diodes.
The working voltage of the varistor can reach up to
150 volts.
REQUIREMENT!
Do not make splices in control unit cable harnesses, as this can affect the CAN communication.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.6 Communication between chassis and body > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
357

Communication via CAN
External CAN
If the bodywork is equipped with a node system
that communicates via CAN, it can be connected to
the external CAN bus. The external CAN bus
makes both information and control signals accessible.
For more information, see Specification of the
Controller Area Network (CAN) in chapter 14, Attachment, in the BBM via SAIL.
Diagnosis via the KWP 2000 protocol
The 0xE6 address is reserved for internal Scania
systems.
FMS (Fleet Management System)
The FMS CAN provides chassis information signals according to the version 3 FMS standard.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.6 Communication between chassis and body > Communication via CAN
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
358

Discrete interface communication
Discrete interface parts are configurable to fit the
requirements of the bus bodybuilder.
If the bus bodybuilder does not want to use the default settings, all reconfiguration and programming logic is done using the BICT programming
tool.
Configurable discrete interface

REQUIREMENT!
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for an altered

BIC being read in the vehicle or sent to a Scania
workshop with the vehicle.
A BIC file configured with the Scania C628 connector default settings can be downloaded from
Chapter 14 Attachment, in the BBM via SAIL
To maximize the use of the discrete interface, it is

possible for the bus bodybuilder to configure
which information and control signals should be
allocated to which pin. This applies to connector
C628.
Using expansion units, the configurable discrete
interface is extended. For more information about
expansion units, see chapter 11.8 Expansion units.
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for creating, in

the BICT programming tool, a file (in BIC format)
with the new configuration to be read in the vehicle
using SDP3. This may be done by the bus bodybuilder or shipped with the vehicle to a Scania
workshop in connection with the BBMQA.
For more information about which connectors constitute this interface, see chapter 11.7 Connection
points for the bodybuilder.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.6 Communication between chassis and body > Discrete interface communication
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
359
BICT (Bodywork Interface Configuration

Tool)
The bus bodybuilder uses BICT to design how the
configurable interface will work. With BICT, you
can specify which command signal should be allocated to which physical input and what information signal should be allocated to which physical
output.
BICT also specifies which electrical signals should
activate an input, for example, if an entry should be
activated with 24 V or grounded.
BICT can be downloaded from TIL via SAIL. In

the manual that comes with the chassis , the basics
of the tool are explained.
344 091
The relationships between signals, such as time delays and extra conditions, are also defined in
BICT.
Configuration is done using the BICT programming
tool.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.6 Communication between chassis and body > Discrete interface communication
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
360

Connection via DIN connector in the rear side member area
At the rear of the frame there is a 7 pin DIN connector (C795) available with signals for rear lighting.
The DIN connector supplies the electrical panel
signals. These signals are described in Chapter
11.7 Bodybuilder connections.
DIN connector (C795) for chassis F 4x2 and 6x2.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.6 Communication between chassis and body > Connection via DIN connector in the rear side member area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
361
348 718
C795
DIN connector (C795) for chassis 8x2 (F bi-articulated).
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.6 Communication between chassis and body > Connection via DIN connector in the rear side member area
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
362
11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder

General
Connectors for communication between chassis
and body are found in the central electric unit.
Connectors can consist of input as well as output
signals. The number of connectors may vary depending on the chassis specification.
Remember to fill out the Bus Builder Function Settings (BBFS) form. The BBFS form must be completed by the bodybuilder and included in the
vehicle for BBMQA inspection.
C693
C471
C694
C695
C627
C628
C629
C697
The BBFS form is available in Chapter 14 Attachments, in the BBM via SAIL.
349 856
C653
Bodywork connector.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
363

External connectors
The following connectors should be used for connection to the chassis.
Connectors
C471
C501
C627
C628
C629
C636
C653
C693
C694
C695
C697
C699
C795
C796
Connector
Connector
Cable terminal
Cable terminal*
Scania part number
TE part number
Scania part number
TE part number
1 392 811
1-967325-1
1 443 329
929970-1
1 443 337
1 508 205
1 431 419
1 443 335
7-968975-1
6-968975-1
8-968970-1
1-968976-9
1 431 421
1 431 419
1 431 422
1 431 422
1 443 335
1 726 452
1 443 335
8-968972-1
8-968970-1
8-968973-1
8-968973-1
1-968976-9
0-967447-1
1-968976-9
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 443 343
1 446 829
1 443 343
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
1-968849-1
929983-1
1-968849-1
* Tin plated cable terminal. Cable area 0.5 to 1

mm.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > External connectors
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
364
Connectors C471, C501, C653
Connectors C627 (F 4x2 and 6x2)
Function
Position
Function
Position
FMS CAN, high

FMS CAN, low
Instrument panel lighting
adjustment
Fuel level sensor 2
C471-1
C471-2
C501-20
Emergency stop activated

Power supply 30
Power supply 15
Power supply 61
External CAN, high
External CAN, low
Inner temperature sensor
W + signal
E500 Speed signal amplifier
Driver seatbelt warning signal
Anti theft alarm
External engine stop
Amending the change program
Daytime light (DRL)
Low washer fluid level
C627-1
C627-2
C627-3
C627-4
C627-5
C627-6
C627-7.8
C627-12
C627-13
C627-14
C627-15
C627-16.17
C627-18.19
C653-4.5
Connectors C520
Function
Position
Mass
C520-1
Left position lamp

Rear left direction indicator
Brake
Rear right direction indicator
Right position lamp
Reversing light
C520-2
C520-3
C520-4
C520-5
C520-6
C520-7
Connectors C628
Inputs and outputs are factory preset. See table in
this chapter, section C628.
Function
Position
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable input
Configurable output
Return grounded to C628-1
C628-1
C628-2
C628-3
C628-4
C628-5
C628-6
C628-7
C628-8
C628-9
C628-10
C628-11
C628-12
C627-20
C627-21
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
365
Connectors C628, continued
Connectors C693
Connectors C694
Function
Position
Function
Position
Function
Position
Configurable output
Configurable output
Configurable output
Configurable output
Configurable output
Configurable output
C628-13
C628-14
C628-15
C628-16
C628-17
C628-18
C628-19
C628-20
C628-21
Front left direction indicator

Front left position lamp
Dipped beam left
Main beam left
Driving light
Front fog light
Main beam right
Dipped beam right
Front right position lamp
Front right direction indicator
Power source, external
External battery master switch
C693-1
C693-2
C693-3
C693-4
C693-5
C693-6
C693-7
C693-8
C693-9
C693-10
C693-11
C693-12
End position of the windscreen

wiper
Windscreen wiper, low speed
Windscreen wiper, high speed
Windscreen washer
Headlight wiper/headlight
washer
Horn
C694-1
Connectors C629
Function
Position
High expansion CAN
C629-1
C629-2
C629-3
C629-4
C629-5
C629-6
Low expansion CAN
C694-2
C694-3
C694-4
C694-5
C694-6
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
366
Connectors C695
Connectors C697
Function
Position
Function
Position
Front left direction indicator

Front left position lamp
Dipped beam left
Main beam left
Driving light
Front fog light
Main beam right
Dipped beam right
Front right position lamp
Front right direction indicator
Power source, external
External battery master switch
C693-1
C693-2
C693-3
C693-4
C693-5
C693-6
C693-7
C693-8
C693-9
C693-10
C693-11
C693-12
Bodybuilder lamps
C697-1 to
C697-10
C693-12
Activation signal
Connectors C795
Function
Position
Rear left direction indicator

Rear left position lamp
Reversing light
C795-1
C795-2
C795-3
Brake light
Rear fog light
Rear right position lamp
Rear right direction indicator
C795-4
C795-5
C795-6
C795-7
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
367

C471
Note:
Ensures termination of the CAN bus for connecting the device to the connector.
320 766
The connector has a termination and the connected

device should have an additional termination.
If the vehicle has a tachograph with termination,
which is not provided by Scania, the FMS device
should not receive termination.
Connector C471.
C471-1 Communication via FMS, high

CAN interface connection with FMS (Fleet Management System).
See Chapter 6.3 under CAN specification for more

information.
C471-2 Communication via FMS, low
Scania is compatible with the standard interface

Bus-FMS version 03.
See C471-1.
For more information about communication via

FMS, see the standard website:
Not used.
http://bus-fms-standard.com/
Not used.
C471-3
C471-4
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > C471
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
368

C501
C501-20 Instrument panel illumination
adjustment
The instrument and clock illumination switch is
used to adjust instrument brightness of chassis
functions.
Use connection point C501-20 if the same switch
is also used to adjust the brightness of components
for bodywork functions.
The C501 connector is located under the instrument panel at chassis delivery.
For more information about the switch, see Chapter 9.5 Instrument panel / Positioning of switches.
The maximum permitted load is 0.5 A.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
369

C520
C520 1-7 Towing connection
Depending on chassis configuration, the wiring
harness for the towing connection is provided inside the accessory box and must be installed by the
bodybuilder. For more information, see Chapter
3.13 Towing of completed bus.
C520-1 Mass.
C520-2 Left position lamp.
C520-3 Rear left direction indicator.
C520-4 Brake light.
C520-5 Rear right direction indicator.
C520-6 Right position lamp.
C520-7 Reversing light.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
370

C653
C653-1 Fuel level sensor
C653-2 Fuel level sensor, level
When the bodybuilder uses its own fuel tank, it is

possible to connect the level sensor by removing
the original chassis harness in the C653-1 connector, 2 (power unit) and connecting the cable harness manufactured by bodybuilder.
See C653-1.
Enter the model in the BBFS document whether

Scania fuel tank and level sensors are used or not.
For more information, see Chapter 11.7 - T16 Fuel

level sensor.
Note:
The level sensor can be connected directly to the

T16 connector.
If original Scania tanks are not used, the resistance

characteristics of the fuel level sensor must be
specified in the BBFS form.
For more information, see Chapter 11.7 - T16 Fuel
level sensor.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
371

C627
21
356 646
19
Connector C627.
C627-1
The output is activated when the emergency stop
switch is activated.
The maximum permitted load is 6 A.
C627-2, voltage 30
C627-4, voltage 61
This output is activated when the battery master

switch is turned on, or if the shutdown is not allowed for safety reasons.
The output is activated when the alternators are

loaded above 20V.
Use the output to activate the bodywork electrical

system. The output can be used to open the door if
the battery master switch is installed on the outside
of the bodywork.
Use the output for systems or functions that can

only be activated when the engine is running.
The maximum permitted load is 6A.
The maximum permitted load is 6A.

C627-3, voltage 15
The output is activated when the ignition key is in
the driving position. If the bus has to brake at a bus
stop, the output can be activated also when the ignition key is not in the driving position.
Use the output for systems that need to be actived
before the engine is started.
Maximum permitted load is 6A.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
372
Extra relay
IMPORTANT!
Connect the connection point to the relay coil as

per the wiring diagram suggested below for the
C627-3 connection point. The same principle applies to points C627-2 and C627-4.
The chassis electrical system functions may be inoperable if connection points C627-2, C, 627-3,
and C627-4 are fed back by the bodywork electrical system.
+24V
Connect a relay if there is risk of voltage being fed

back to the connection points.
85
86
30
87
87a
OUT
C627
344 067
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
373
External CAN C627-5, high
C627-7 Inner temperature sensor
External CAN C627-6, low
Input for inner temperature sensor. Depending on

chassis specification, a function sensor may be
provided in the chassis accompanying materials
box
Connecting bus bodybuilder nodes to the system.
C627-8 Inner temperature sensor

(Ground)
See C627-7
The internal vehicle temperature is shown in the

instrument cluster.
Scania recommends placing the sensor in the ceiling of the centre of the vehicle, in a location not affected by:
climate system air diffuser

direct sunlight
appliances, such as a coffee maker
320 758
Sensors.
7
8
C627
344 068
C627
Wiring diagram.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
374

C628
Extra E/S is an interface extended with configurable inputs and outputs.
21
356 645
19
Connector C628.
General
C628 is the connector that contains all configurable inputs and outputs for communication between body and chassis.
The inputs and outputs are discrete and always preprogrammed with Scania functions and activation
voltage. See the table in the next section.
The number of configurable pins varies depending
on whether the vehicle is specified with or without
extra E/S.
C628 input and output configuration is made using

the BICT programming tool. The program can be
downloaded from TIL via SAIL.
Read more about configurability in chapter 11.6
Communication between chassis and body, in the
section Discrete configurable interface.
The outlets are of PWM type, and all outlets except

two can be activated high or low. They can also be
freely configured according to the available signals in BICT.
The other two signals provide a simulated tachograph signal (TCO signal) and can be used to generate a pulse signal for distance or speed according
to ISO 16844-2. For more information, see section
Tachograph (TCO) signals in this chapter.
C628connector inputs and outputs

The connector consists of 21 configurable positions, of which 10 are inputs and 7 outputs. All are
available if it is specified that the vehicle has extra
E/S, otherwise only 4 inputs and 2 outputs are
available. See the tables in this chapter.
The inputs have three statuses and triple state types
and can activate 24 V (high active) or ground (low
active) signals. These signals can be freely configured with functions available in the BICT program
(with restrictions depending on vehicle specifications).
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
375
Position
Input/output
C628-1
C628-2
C628-3
C628-4
C628-5*
C628-6*
C628-7*
C628-8*
C628-9*
C628-10*
C628-11
C628-12
C628-13
C628-14
C628-15
C628-16*
C628-17*
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Permitted
Activation
load
0 to 3 A
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
Tristate
High/low
0 to 3 A
High/low
High/low
0 to 3 A
High/low
High/low
Type
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable, TCO signal
Configurable
Configurable, TCO signal
Configurable
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
376
Position
C628-18
C628-19*
C628-19*
C628-20*
C628-21
Input/output
Output
Output
Output
Permitted
Activation
load
Type
0 to 3 A
0 to 3 A
0 to 3 A

Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
High/low
High/low
High/low
* Only available if the vehicle is specified with extra E/S.

Scania default setting
Position
Input/output
Activation
Configuration
C628-1
C628-2
C628-3
C628-4
Input
Input
Input
Input
High
High
High
High
C628-5*
C628-6*
C628-7*
Input
Input
Input
High
High
High
Bus stop sign activated

Door open
Hatch open
Motor hatch open (incl. prevent engine starting with
key
Prevent all engine ignition activations
Activate remote hazard warning signal
Activate remote horn
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
377
Position
Input/output
Activation
Configuration
C628-8*
C628-9*
C628-10*
C628-11
C628-12
C628-13
C628-14
C628-15
C628-16*
C628-17*
C628-18
C628-19*
C628-20*
C628-21
Input
Input
Input
Output
High
High
High
High
Output
Output
High
High
Output
Output
High
High
Output
Output
High
High
Torque indicator
Pram signal
Stop signal
Parking brake applied
Remote TCO signal
Vehicle speed over 5 km/h
TCO Vdo signal
Bus stop brake activated
Door opening authorised
Vehicle speed 3-120 km/h
* Only available if the vehicle is specified with extra E/S.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
378

C629
C629-1 Expansion CAN, high
BCI connection, high CAN expansion unit.
1
C629-3 Expansion CAN, low

BCI connection, low CAN expansion unit.
318 991
Connector C629
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
379

C693
10
Direction indicator sound
LED (light emitting diode)
Enter in the BBFS specimen document if the direction indicator sound should be activated or disabled. The Scania default is activated.
Enter "LED or 1 lamp" in the BBFS form and verify that the LED lights consume more than 200 mA
together. For a LED and lamp combination, select
"LED and 1 lamp" in the BBFS.
Note:
Note that in some countries, the vehicle must by

law be equipped with a sound indicator for the direction indicators.
12
318 989
Connector C693.
C693-1 Direction indicator, front left

Use the output to supply voltage to the direction indicator on the left side of the vehicle. Maximum
load allowed for the output is 5 A.
Incorrect indication by the direction

indicator
Note:
Scania does not verify that the vehicle complies

with current legal requirements regarding fault indication when using LED lights in direction indicators.
Specify in the BBFS form how many lights are

used for output, as shown below. The current limit
used to identify a broken lamp is indicated between brackets.
LED or 1 lamp (200 mA)

LED and 1 lamp (1 A)
2 lamps (1.25 A)
3 lamps (2.2 A)
4 lamps (3.3 A)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
380
C693-2 Front left position lamp
C693-3 Dipped beam, left
GDL (Gas discharge light)
Use the output to supply voltage to the position

lamps and parking lights on the left side of the vehicle. The output is connected internally to connection point C795-2 Rear position lamp on the
left side of the vehicle, and connection point C69510 position lamp on the left side of the trailer.
Use the output to supply voltage to the dipped

beam on the left side of the vehicle. The maximum
load for the output is 8.5 A. The error detection can
be used to display if the output load is below 300
mA.
Recommended equipment: Scania GDL Ballast

part number 1 746 876 with lamp.
All position lamps on the left side are connected to

the same fuse. The fuse supports a maximum current of 10 A. Control of all position lamps on both
sides takes place through relay 21.
Enter in the BBFS specimen document whether
Scania error detection should be used or not for relay 21.
Specify in the BBFS form if Scania error detection

should be used for the output or not.
Enter in the BBFS specimen document, under
Type of headlamp, if the high beam should be activated simultaneously or separately from the
dipped beam. Or if bi-halogen/bi-xenon (single
source projector) lights should be used.
Scania accepts bi-halogen and bi-xenon lights for
headlamps and dipped beams in combination with
daytime light (DRL).
Specify "simultaneous activation" under Type of

headlamp in the BBFS specimen document if GDL
type lights are used. The output can supply 8.5 A
continuously after 1 second.
If non-Scania equipment is used, proceed as follows:
Connect an external relay if the equipment has

a maximum permitted load higher than the
Scania equipment.
Specify "error detection is not used" for

dipped beam in the BBFS specimen document.
Disable Scania error detection selecting the "error
detection is not used" in the BBFS speciment document if the bus bodybuilder uses lights within its
own multiplex system or relays.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
381
C693-4 Main beam, left
C693-5 Driving light
C693-9 Position light, front right
Use the output to supply voltage to the main beam

on the left side of the vehicle.
The output activates the driving light. Maximum

load for this output is 8.5 A.
Maximum load allowed for the output is 8.5 A.
C693-6 Front foglamp
Use the output to supply voltage to the position

lamps and parking lights on the right side of the vehicle. The output is connected internally to connection point C795-6 Rear position lamp on the
right side of the vehicle, and connection point
C695-14 Position lamp on the right side of the
trailer.
The error detection can be used to show if the output load is below 300 mA.
Specify in the BBFS form if Scania error detection
should be used for the output or not.
Scania accepts bi-halogen and bi-xenon lights for
headlamps and dipped beams in combination with
daytime light (DRL).
GDL (Gas discharge light)
Connect an external relay if the current exceeds 8.5
A. Also specify "error detection is not used" for the
main beam in the BBFS form.
The output activates the front foglamp of the bus.

Maximum load for this output is 8.5 A.
C693-7 Main beam, right
Use the output to supply voltage to the main beam
on the right side of the vehicle. Regarding specifications, see C693-4 Main beam, left.
C693-8 Dipped beam, right
Use the output to supply voltage to the dipped
beam on the right side of the vehicle. Regarding
specifications, see C693-3 Dipped beam, left.
All position lamps on the right side are connected

to the same fuse. The fuse supports a maximum
current of 10 A. Control of all position lamps on
both sides takes place through relay 21.
Scania error detection should be used or not for relay 21.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
382
C693-10 Direction indicator, front right

Use the output to supply voltage to the direction indicator on the right side of the vehicle. Regarding
specifications, see C693-1.
C693-11 External battery master switch

for power supply
This output supplies power from the battery to the
switch explained in the section below (C693-12).
C693-12 External battery master switch
This input activates the main power relay (30).
C693
12
POW.126.OG-0,75
11
POW.126.OG-0,75
349 837
C693
Active high.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
383

C694
C694-1 End position of the windscreen
wiper
1
C694-2 Windscreen wiper with low speed
318 991
The VIS (Visibility System) interprets that the

windscreen wiper is at the end position when the
signal from the wiper motor is at low level (0V).
Connector C694.
Use the output to supply voltage for the first wiper

motor speed. Maximum permitted load for the output is below 12 A continuously. The system manages a top load of up to 15 A for a maximum of 10
seconds, for longer or higher loads the system detects an error.
State whether or not error detection from Scania

shall be used for the output in the BBFS specimen
document.
Connect an external relay if the load is higher than
indicated above. Specify "error detection is not
used" in the BBFS specimen document when using
an external relay.
The system detects errors even if there is no load

on the output.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
384
C694-3 Windscreen wiper with high speed

For information about the output, see C694-2
Windscreen wiper with low speed.

an external relay.

shall be used in the BBFS specimen document.
Connection of individual windscreen

wiper motors

an external relay.
Connect the motors for the windscreen wipers

(1,2). The wipers can be connected according to
the two options that are shown on the next page.
Both high speed and low speed can be used on both
wiper motors.
C-694-4 Windscreen washer

shall be used in the BBFS specimen document.
311 218
Use the output to supply voltage to the windshield

washer motor. Maximum permitted load for the
output is 5 A. Error detection indicates if there is
no load on the output.
1. Windscreen wiper motor

2. Windscreen wiper motor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
385
CUV
R
Mx1
Mx2
Description
1 3 2
The diodes Dx3 and Dx4 are for suppression (optional).
CUV
C694
Diode, e.g. 1N4007.

Diode 20 A, e.g.: 20ETS08 or
25F10.
Fuse capacity must be sized
according to the M2 engine
load.
Relay e.g.: Scania 1431781.
Bodybuilder windscreen wiper
motor.
Bodybuilder windscreen wiper
motor.
86
Dx5
Dx2
Dx1
85
1 3 2
30
87
+24 V (30)
87a
C694
R
86
Dx5
86 87
85
Dx2
Dx1
87a
85
30
87
87a
30
R
86 87
85
87a
30
R
Dx3
Mx1
Connection proposal 1.
Mx2
Dx4
Dx3
Mx1
Mx2
Dx4
322 524
Dx1 to Dx4
Dx5
+24 V (30)
322 523
Component
code
If the windscreen wiper motors have an end position interval of less than 60 ms, then use connection option 2 instead.
Connection proposal 2.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
386
Use the output for headlight cleaning. The maximum permitted load for the output is 16 A. Connect an external relay if the load is higher than
previously indicated. Headlamp cleaning is only
activated when the main beam is washed or when
activated.
The output supports two types of headlamp cleaning:
headlamp cleaning with headlamp wiper
headlamp cleaning with high pressure

Enter in the BBFS specimen document the headlamp cleaning type that should be used. The Scania
default setting is headlamp cleaning with high
pressure.
Headlamp cleaning with headlamp wiper
If headlamp cleaning with headlamp wiper is indicated, the output is activated while the windshield
washer is turned on.
Headlamp cleaning with high pressure
Extra horn
If headlamp cleaning with high pressure is specified, the output will be activated less frequently
and for a shorter time in order to save washer fluid.
To install the extra horn, the bodybuilder must

make a harness that allows selection between the
main horn and the extra horn, as per the circuit suggested below.
For information about the parameters that can be

adjusted for headlamp cleaning with high pressure,
see next page.
5
3
Note:
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for any headlamp cleaning certification.

C694-6 Horn
Use the output to supply voltage for the horn. Maximum load allowed for output is 5 A.
An error will be detected if there is no load or an
overload in the output. State whether error detection from Scania must be used on the BBFS specimen form.
10
7
1
6
C694
20
C501
S28
346 183
C694-5 / headlamp wiper / headlamp

washer
Depending on the technical specifications of the

extra horn, error detection may not work properly.
If necessary, state on the BBFS specimen form
whether Scania error detection must be used.
To obtain information on fitting the horn, see
Chapters 6.3 Pneumatic system components and
11.3 Connecting items to the bodywork.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
387

C695
C695-2 to C795-2
1
C695-3 to C795-3
13
C695-4 to C795-4
C695-5 to C795-5
15
318 988
Connector C695.
C695-9 Trailer connection: left direction

indicator
Separate output for trailer left-hand direction indicator. For specification, see Connector C795-1
Rear left direction indicator.
C695-6 to C795-6
Trailer detection:
C695-7 to C795-7
The trailer will be detected if there is load at the

output. No trailer detection will be made if speed
exceeds 5 kph. If a trailer is detected, open load detection for the output will be activated.
C695-8
Not used.
C695-1 to C795-1
Pins 1 to 7 are already in use for the rear lighting
cable fitted at the factory.
C695-10 Trailer connection: left-hand side

position lights
The output can be used for the position lights and
the left-hand side rear lights. For the specification,
see Connector C693-2 Front left-hand position
lights.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
388
C695-11 Trailer connection: reverse lights

Separate output for trailer reverse lights.
For the specification, see Connector C795-3 Reverse lights.
C695-12 Trailer connection: brake lights
C695-14 Trailer connection: right-hand

side position lights
C695-15 Trailer connection: right direction

indicator
This output can be used for the position lights and

the right-hand side rear lights. For the specification, see Connector C693-9 Front right-hand position lights.
Separate output for trailer right-hand direction indicator. For specification, see Connector C795-1
Rear left direction indicator.
Separate output for trailer stop lights. For the specification, see Connector C795-4 Brake lights.
C695-13 Trailer connection: foglights
Separate output for trailer foglights. For the specification, see Connector C795-5 Rear foglights.
Trailer detection:
The trailer will be detected if there is load at the
output. No trailer detection will be made if speed
exceeds 5 kph. If a trailer is detected, open load detection for the output will be activated.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
389

C795 Mounted at rear of chassis
LED:
Activation time for the LED bulbs must be 20 ms
or more in order to function correctly.
C795-2 Rear left position lights
The output can be used for the position lights and
the left-hand side rear lights. For the specification,
see Connector C693-2 Front left-hand position
lights.
Connector C795.
C795-1 Rear left direction indicator

This output drives the bulb(s) of the rear left direction indicator. The maximum load for this output is
7.5 A. The lower limit of current measurement is
approximately 200 mA. Open load may be detected if there is no output load.
C795-3 Reversing lights

The output operates the reversing light bulbs. This
output is connected internally to C695-11. Maximum current consumption for this output is 10 A.
FP OLRevLight establishes whether the open
charge on the internal relay must be detected or
not.
C795-4 Brake lights

The output drives the brake light bulbs. This output
is connected internally to C695-12. Maximum
electrical current consumption for this output is 10
A. FP OLStopLight, establishes whether the open
charge on the internal relay must be detected or
not.
C795-5 Rear foglights
This output drives the rear foglight bulb.
This output is connected internally to C695-13.
Maximum electrical current consumption for this
output is 6 A.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > C795 Mounted at rear of chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
390
C795-6 Rear left position lights

This output can be used for the position lights and
the right-hand side rear lights. For the specification, see Connector C693-9 Front right-hand position lights.
C795-7 Rear right direction indicator
Separate output for right rear direction indicator.
For specification, see Connector C795-7 Rear left
direction indicator.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > C795 Mounted at rear of chassis
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
391

Tachograph (TCO) signals
IMPORTANT!
Pins B7 and B8 are only available on buses supplied with tachographs (TCO). If a bus does not
have a tachograph, the speed signal will only be
available in the CAN system.
TCO signals
Speed signal, output (B7).

Features according to ISO 16844-2.
Distance signal, 4 pulses/m (B8).
The distance signal (pin B8) generates 4 pulses for
every metre travelled.
Features according to ISO 16844-2.
The following cable terminal flat socket shall be

used:
One cable: Scania part number 815702 (part

number AMP 927845-2).
Two cables: Scania part number 815703 (part
number AMP 927856-2).
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > Tachograph (TCO) signals
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
392
Attachment
Taken from ISO 16844-2
Pin
Description
B7
Speed Pulse Output

U low
U high
Frequency (1/T)
Pulse Duration (t)
Pulse Duration
Accuracy Tachograph constant (k)
Distance signal
B8
4 pulses/m
U low
U high
Frequency
Pulse Duration (t1)
Minimum
Maximum
Remark
1.5 V
See 3.2.2.1.2
I =1 mA
I =-1 mA
5.5 V
0.64 ms
4000 Imp./km
1.528 kHz
4 ms
1%
25000 Imp./km
See 3.2.2.1.3
1.5 V
5.5 V
244 Hz
Optional
I =1 mA
I =-1 mA
v= 220 kph
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
393
3.2.2.1.2 Speed pulse output, Timing

Diagram
Speed pulse output [B7]
Maximum of 40 s of deceleration within 10 s
of instability.
The following formulas describe the relationship

between speed (v), tachograph constant (k) and
speed pulse output (t, T).
T [s] =
t [ms] =
v [km/h] =
v [km/h] =
1/f motion sensor [Hz]

16,000/k [Imp./km]
3,600/(k [Imp./km]xT [s])
3,600 /((16/t[s]) x T[s]) = 225 x t
[s] /T [s]
3.2.2.1.3 Distance signal 4 Pulses/m,

Timing Diagram
Distance signal.
Each positive edge represents a distance of 250

mm, as average over 1 km.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
394
Vehicles without tachograph
Preparation for driver identification
For more information about the discrete speed signal and the traffic system if the bus does not have
a tachograph, see connection point C627-13.
Driver identification with Scania Communicator

200 for vehicles without a digital tachograph.
Depending on the chassis specification, a cable
harness to connect the driver identification can be
attached to the chassis.
The identification buttons (iButton) and the
reader are not supplied by Scania. It is possible to
connect to a reader with or without lamp.
The lamp signal is active high. The signal voltage
is 24 V. The maximum permitted output load is
200 mA.
Suggested procedure to connect the reader to the

cable harness:
1.
Connect the E89.E connector.

2. Attach the RTC74 electrical cable to position
12 of the E89.F connector.
3. Connect the reader to the cable harness as follows:
a. Connect the RTC49 electrical cable from
pin 4 to the E89.E connector for the reader
signal.
b. Connect the RTC50 electrical cable from
pin 6 to the E89.E connector to ground the
reader, and grounding it in one of the reader lamps.
c. Connect the RTC74 electrical cable from
pin 12 of the E89.F connector to any reader lamp.
For more information, see the Scania Communicator 200 (C200) wiring diagram.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
395

T16, fuel level sensor
T16-1 Fuel level sensor

Scania fuel tank and level sensors are used or not.
When the bodybuilder uses its own fuel tank, it is

possible to connect the level sensor directly to the
T16 connector.
Fuel gauge readings are dependent on the configuration of the fuel level sensor. The fuel gauge is integrated into the instrument cluster.
T16-2 Fuel level sensor

See T16-1.
REQUIREMENT!
Make sure the fuel level sensor is accessible for

maintenance and error (fault) diagnosis.
Fuel tank.
Note:
If it is necessary to increase the length of the wiring harness, the connection must be in an accessible place and be done with a waterproof connector.
Note:
The level sensor can be connected to the C653 connector, via a cable manufactured by the bodybuilder.
For more information, see Chapter 11.7 C653.
The original chassis connector can also be replaced, since the connector is waterproof.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > T16, fuel level sensor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
396
Connection of fuel level sensor
Calibrating the fuel level sensor
The T16 connector is attached:
If the bus does not have the Scania fuel tank and
level sensor, the gauge on the instrument cluster
(ICL) should be reprogrammed.
in central chassis area (4x2 and 6x2)

above the centre module axle (8x2)
The resistance configuration for a non-Scania level

sensor is 10-360 ohm (ascending), but a level sensor with a resistance of 360-10 ohm (descending)
can also be used.
Specify in the BBFS specimen form the type of
level sensor installed in the vehicle, so that if necessary the ICL reprogramming is performed during the BBMQA.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > T16, fuel level sensor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
397

The bus bodybuilder's own fuel level sensor
Measuring fuel level sensor features
Fit the sensor in the tank. Measure respectively the
actual resistance for 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100% of the
total fuel volume.
IMPORTANT!
Level sensors with resistance below 10 ohm can

generate error codes in the electrical system.
Measure the resistance for the fuel level sensor

with different amounts of fuel. For each point of
measurement the sensor resistance should be added, as shown below:
Total fuel
volume
(litres)
Tank
percentage
(%)
Resistance
to enter into
the BBFS
specimen
document
0
100
200
300
400
0
25
50
75
100
10
40
80
150
180
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > The bus bodybuilder's own fuel level sensor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
398
Fuel level sensor electrical connections

Pin connector
Scania part number
1 447 743
TE part number
1-967402-1
Cable terminals
Area mm Scania part
number
0.5 - 1.0 1 443 332
1.2 - 2.5 1 443 333
2.6 - 4.0 1 443 334
TE part number
(part by part)
962967-1
962968-1
962969-1
Seals
Area mm Scania part
number
0.5 - 1.0 1 446 822
1.2 - 2.5 1 446 823
2.6 - 4.0 1 446 824
TE part number
828920-1
828921-1
828985-1
Plug
Area mm
0.5 - 2.5
Scania part
number
1 446 825
TE part number
828922-1
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.7 Connection points for the bodybuilder > The bus bodybuilder's own fuel level sensor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
399
11.8 Activatable chassis functions

Bodywork information for the driver
Description
Separate connection
Separate connection
Function to provide information to the driver about

the different functions of the bus body through the
bus bodybuilder lamps, the display or a sound indication. What is displayed is specified through the
function parameters of the SDP3 instrument cluster.
Configurable connection point C628, BIC.
Configurable connection point C697, ICL.
Activation conditions:
Activated through bodywork request.
Deactivation conditions:
Deactivated through bodywork request.
Name
Name
DriverInformationRequest1
Continuous alarm sound
Continuous warning sound
Single warning sound
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Bodywork information for the driver
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
400
Connection via CAN

Message: signal
Name
BodyworkDriverInformation2_Unknown::DriverInformationRequest1
BodyworkDriverInformation2_Unknown::ContinuousAlarmSound
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
401
Related function parameters

DriverInformationRequest 1-10 activated by
C697, CAN or BICT and configured in SDP3.
Indicator messages
Fire in the passenger area
Emergency exit open
Door open
Low air pressure at door
Sensing strip in door triggered
Climate system error
Bodywork system error
Door failure
Driver door open
Toilet alarm
Luggage compartment alarm
Stop signal
Wheelchair signal
Drinking water tank level low
Wastewater tank level high
Lamps
Notes
Without
Warning
Information
Warning
Information
Warning
Status
Alarm
Information
Alarm
Information
Alarm
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Alarm
Warning
Lamp 1
Lamp 1
Lamp 2
Lamp 2
Lamp 3
Lamp 3
Lamp 4
Lamp 4
Lamp 5
Lamp 5
Lamp 6
Lamp 7
Lamp 7
Lamp 8
Lamp 8
Lamp 9
Lamp 9
Lamp 10
Lamp 10
Sound
Notes
Without
Warning
Warning - Continuous
No sound used
Single warning signal
Continuous warning
signal
Single sound signal
Continuous alarm signal
Single sound signal
Stop signal
Alarm - Continuous
Pram and wheelchair
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
402

Seatbelt warning signal
Description
Seatbelt warning configuration
Connection via BICT
The instrument cluster displays an indication of

whether the power is on and the seatbelt on the
driver's side is not fastened (analog signal from the
buckle to the ICL pin). If the driver has not fastened the seatbelt when the vehicle exceeds 25 km/
h, a signal sounds to warn about fastening it.
Configurable connection point C628.
There are 5 different options to configure the seatbelt warning signal. The Scania default is Euro
NCAP. Specify in the BBFS specimen form if the
configuration should be changed by SDP3 at BBMQA inspection. In the BICT program, an information signal can be carried to a configurable pin.
See chapter 11.6 Communication between chassis
and body.
Separate connection
The seatbelt warning signal is activated when

the driver has not fastened the belt and the ignition is turned on.
The seatbelt was fastened.
Name
Notes

activated
Information signal
Connection point C691.

Name
Notes

activated
No sound used
Connection via CAN

Message signal
Name
Notes
Cab Information Proprietary 1

(0x18FF9617)::SeatbeltReminder
Indicates when the belt is not fastened
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Seatbelt warning signal
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
403

Parameter
Value
Description
Without
Lamp
USA
With/without
With/without
With/without
Euro NCAP
With/without
Euro 40 km/h
With/without
Deactivates the seatbelt warning function

Deactivates the sound indicator so that only the indicator lamp warns that the seatbelt is not being used.
Means that the warning light stays on while the seatbelt is not being used. The warning signal will sound if the seatbelt
is not being used and the speed exceeds 25 km/h.
Provides the same result as those for USA, but the warning signal stops sounding after 90 seconds. "With" is the Scania
default for this option
Provides the same results as Euro NCAP, but the warning signal is activated if the speed exceeds 40km/h
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Seatbelt warning signal
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
404

Passenger signals
Description
Function to give passengers the possibility to pass
information to the driver by activating passenger
signals.

Parameter
Value
Indication of the stop

signal function
Lamp
Display
Lamp and display
LmpadaComSom
DisplayComSom
LmpadaEDisplayComSom
Lamp
Display
Lamp and display
LmpadaComSom
DisplayComSom
LmpadaEDisplayComSom
Lamp
LmpadaComSom
Indication of the
wheelchair function
Indication of the pram

signal function
Separate connection
Name
Stop signal sound
Pram signal sound
Wheelchair signal sound
Pram signal
Stop signal
Wheelchair signal
Toilet alarm
Luggage compartment door alarm
Visual notification of wheelchair signal
Visual notification of pram signal
Visual notification of stop signal
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Passenger signals
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
405
Connection via CAN

Message: signal
Name
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::StopSignalSound
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::PramSignalSound
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::WheelchairSignalSound
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::ToiletAlarm
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::LuggageCompartmentAlarm
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::WheekchairSignalVisual
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::PramSignalVisual
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unknown::StopSignalVisual
Stop signal sound

Pram signal sound
Wheelchair signal sound
Toilet alarm
Luggage compartment door alarm
Visual notification of wheelchair signal
Visual notification of pram signal
Visual notification of stop signal
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Passenger signals
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
406

Open hatch indication
Description
Separate connection
Function to inform the driver about open hatches

on the instrument cluster.

Operating recommendations
For safety reasons, Scania recommends that this
function is used for all luggage compartment doors
and engine hatches.
Name
Activate open hatch indication
Connection via CAN
Message: signal
Name
BodyworkDriverInformation1_Unkown::HatchOpen
Hatch open
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Open hatch indication
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
407

Description
Separate connection
Function to inform the driver about the current internal temperature on the instrument cluster.
Connection point
Name
C627-7
C627-8

Internal temperature sensor, grounded
Depending on chassis configuration, a sensor

is provided for this function.
If one or more of the following conditions are met,
"-C" will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
If the resistance drops below a defined value.

If the resistance increases above a defined value.
If the circuit is broken or shorted to ground/
24V.
Connection via CAN

Message signal
Name
Notes
AmbientCondition_BCI::CabInteriorTemperature
Internal temperature
Bus bodybuilder and ICL display signal
Place the sensor in the ceiling at the centre of the
vehicle, in a location not affected by:
Climate system air vent.

Direct sunlight.
Heat generating equipment, such as a coffee
maker.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Inner temperature sensor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
408

Speed l
imiter
Description
Separate connection
This function allows the use of 2 speed limiters

that can be activated separately, either through
separate inputs or via CAN
Configurable connection point C628
When the speed limiter is activated, the vehicle

speed will be limited to the specified value for each
parameter respectively.
It is also possible to request a defined speed limit
via CAN. Different speed limits can be requested
in different periods.
If multiple speed limiters are active at the same
time, the speed limiter with the lowest value will
command the speed.
Note that these speed limiters can not affect a
speed limiter controlled by legal requirements.
Name
Activate speed limiter
Activate speed limiter3
Connection via CAN
Message signal
Name
BodyworkVehicleControl::VehicleSpeedLimitRequest
BodyworkVehicleControl::VehicleSpeedLimit
Activate speed limiter

Dynamic speed limiter

Parameter
Value
Description
Vehicle speed limiter 2

Vehicle speed limiter 3
5 to 150 km/h
5 to 150 km/h
Speed limit 2
Speed limit 3
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Speed l
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
imiter
409

Disconnection of power supply, 24V
Description
Function that controls the relay activation process

for the battery master switch (R500). The electrical
system of the body is informed via a CAN message
about an incoming current disconnection. The system can delay this (max. 40 seconds) by requesting
it via a specific CAN message.
Use the signal in the following table to delay shutdown of the current when the vehicle has equipment requiring time to shut down, for example,
sunroofs and ticket machines. The request must be
sent within 2 seconds of sending the BCI:
ScaniaVehicleStatusMessage1_BCI::ExternalBatteryRelayOffIntended
Connection via CAN
Engine switched off.

Vehicle stationary.
Power switched off.
Parking brake activated.
No delay request by the body electrical system.
The switch of the battery master switch (S500)
is off.
Message: signal
Name
Notes
BodyworkVehicleControl_EXT::BatteryRealyHoldRequest
Request battery master switch

delay activation (max. 40 s)
Must be updated within 300 ms.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Disconnection of power supply, 24V
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
410

Battery master switch warning
Description
Function that activates the warning lights and the

horn (optional) signal when the driver closes the
battery master switch handle while the bus stop
brake is applied and the braking force mode is on
automatic hill hold. This is to alert the driver to apply the parking brake. The warning is given since
the switch of the battery master switch (S500) can
be installed on the outside of the bus, making the
parking brake warning on the instrument panel insufficient.
Use this function if there is a lever on the outside

of the vehicle to activate the battery master switch.
Parameter
Value
Description
Battery master switch warning
With/without
Battery master switch, horn duration
0 to 300
This parameter activates/deactivates the

warning
(Optional) How many seconds the horn
should remain active
Engine switched off.

Vehicle stationary.
Key in the lower position.
The parking brake is not engaged.
The switch of the battery master switch (S500)
is off.
The bus stop brake is active.
The automatic hill hold is active.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Battery master switch warning
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
411

Fuel level sensor
Description T16, fuel level sensor
Calibrating the fuel level sensor
Measuring fuel level sensor features
Fuel gauge readings are dependent on the configuration of the fuel level sensors. The fuel gauge is
integrated into the instrument cluster.
All chassis are supplied with T16 connector.
The characteristics of the fuel tank sensor system

must be configured with the general parameter settings of the chassis. The configuration is performed by a Scania workshop during a BBMQA
inspection.
Fit the sensor in the tank. Measure the actual resistance for 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100% of the total fuel
volume. To obtain a more exact measurement, up
to 30 measurement points may be defined. It is recommended to use at least 5 measurement points.
Connection of fuel level sensor
Enter the calibration data in the BBFS form.
If multiple fuel tanks and fuel level sensors are

used, install the fuel level sensors in their final positions before measuring the resistance.
The T16 connector is attached to the front axle

module when the chassis:
was supplied by Scania without fuel tanks.
is specified with a transport tank.

When the fuel tanks are installed on two levels, a
fuel level sensor for each tank level is required.
Report the resistance values obtained during the

measurement of the fuel level sensor features. Also
report the total volume of the fuel tanks in the
BBFS form.
Measure the resistance for both fuel level sensors

for the different fuel volumes. The resistance is
added from both sensors for each measuring point.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Fuel level sensor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
412

Fuel level sensor 2
Description
In buses with fuel tanks on two levels it is necessary to install an additional fuel level sensor, i.e.
two fuel level sensors in total.
Indicate on the BBFS form if 1 or 2 fuel level sensors will be used.
When a chassis is delivered with fuel tanks installed by Scania on two levels, the fuel level sensors are connected to the T16 and T537
connectors.
When a bodybuilder uses its own fuel tanks, the
chassis is delivered with a transport tank. In the
case of fuel tanks at multiple levels, the bodybuilder should make a custom cable harness and connect it to the C653, pins 4 and 5.
Also inform on the BBFS form if Scania fuel tanks

and fuel level sensors will be used, indicating the
features of the fuel level sensor.
It is possible to specify fuel level sensor reverse
features in the BBFS form for sensors with reverse
features. For example, 180-10 ohm corresponds to
0-100% of fuel, instead of 10-180 ohm corresponding to 0-100% of fuel.
Separate connection
Connection point
Name
C653-4
C653-5
Fuel level sensor 2

Fuel level sensor 2,
grounded
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Fuel level sensor 2
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
413

Emergency stop device
Description
Seatbelt warning configuration
When activated, this function initiates a controlled

vehicle shutdown in the event of an emergency.
The function purpose is to:
When the CAN signal is active, the bodywork

electrical system must, when stopped, switch off
all electrical consumers. Except for those functions required for safe evacuation of the vehicle,
for example emergency lighting.
make the vehicle stop quickly.
switch off the engine.
minimize fire risk by activating the battery

master switch.
warn other road users by activating the warning light signal.

The emergency shutdown switch (S568) is active.
The emergency shutdown switch (S568) is deactivated.
It is important that the door system can be operated

when the battery master switch is turned off. This
can be done by connecting the door system to the
U30 battery.
Connection via CAN
Message: signal
Name
ScaniaVehicleStatusMessage1::EmergencySwitchActivated
Signal that is active when the emergency shutdown

switch (S568) is active

Parameter
Value
Description
Vehicle speed conditions

for emergency shutdown
Moving/stationary Specifies whether the function should allow engine

shutdown when moving (<8 km/h) or stationary.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Emergency stop device
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
414

Prevent vehicle operation
Description
Separate connection
The function makes it possible to prevent engine

ignition through a separate input or via CAN.
Separate signals are used to prevent all engine ignition, only using the key or remote ignition, for
example, the ignition box in the engine compartment.
When using an alcohol intake detector, it is important to decide if it should prevent ignition both
through the key and the ignition box, or only by
key.
Name
prevent all engine ignition activations
Prevent engine ignition with key
Prevent remote engine ignition
Connection via CAN
Message: signal
Name
BodyworkEngineRequest::InhibitAllStartRequest
BodyworkEngineRequest::InhibitKeyStartRequest
BodyworkEngineRequest::InhibitKeyStartRequest
Prevent all engine ignition activations

Prevent engine ignition with key
Prevent remote engine ignition
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Prevent vehicle operation
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
415

Remote engine shutdown
Description
Separate connection
This function enables engine shutdown using a request via a separate input or via CAN. Two (2) different signals can be used for this and both allow
engine shutdown up to a defined speed. For emergency shutdown, the speed limit can be configured
with a parameter.
Configurable connection point C628
An active request forces engine rotation to drop to

idle if the speed exceeds the limit, and then shuts
the engine down. When the speed drops below the
permitted limit, the engine will shut down.
Connection via CAN
When a request is active, the driver is informed by

an ICL indication.
The speed limit for remote engine shutdown is

10 km/h.
The emergency shutdown speed limit can be
configured.
Name
Activate remote engine shutdown
Activate remote emergency engine shutdown
Message signal
Name
BodyworkEngineRequest::EngineShutDown
Activate remote engine shutdown
BodyworkEngineRequest::EmergencyEngineShutDown Activate remote emergency engine shutdown
Parameter
Value
Description
Vehicle speed conditions for

emergency shutdown
1 to 10 km/h
Speed below which the emergency

engine shutdown is possible.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Remote engine shutdown
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
416

Engine shutdown at idle
Description
A funtion that shuts down the engine if the parking

brake is engaged or the bus stop brake is activated.
To use the function, the vehicle must be set according to the instructions in the user functions "Bus
stop brake" and "Door and ramp status display".
This feature is only found on buses with a powertrain that supports automatic start and stop and requiring a CAN connection to the bodywork.
The starter motor is not blocked, see functional description "Prevent vehicle operation".
The bus doors are closed.
The bus stop brake is deactivated.
The sensors detect that the driver is not in position.

A parking brake warning may be issued in certain
situations, if the engine can not be restarted and
other conditions are met.
1.
The bus stop brake is activated.

2. The bus doors were opened.
3. The sensors detect that the driver is in position,
see the "Driver area warning" signal.
4. The driver presses the accelerator or brake.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Engine shutdown at idle
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
417
Connection
The door position signal should only show the

door position on ICL. The other signals should be
used to indicate other events, such as door malfunction and emergency opening.
The following functions must be activated according to their functional descriptions to work correctly.
The sensor indicating the driver is in position must

be connected to the driver's door. If other sensors
are used or sensors are installed in other locations,
an agreement must be signed with Scania.
The content of the functional description "Prevent

vehicle operation" must be followed to avoid unexpected engine ignition when the engine compartment hatch is open. This is to improve the
safety of all who are working near the engine.
Bus stop brake

Prevent vehicle operation
Connection via CAN

Message: signal
Name
Notes
DoorControl1::PositionOfDoors
Door position
BodyworkDriverInformation1::DriverAreaWarning
Driver area warning
The engine starts when the doors are

closed
The "No warning" signal value must be
sent to the engine in order to be shut
down. The value 1 must be sent and not
0, which is the norm for other sensor signals.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Engine shutdown at idle
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
418

Activate the torque usage indicator of the AC compressor
Description
Parameter configuration
Function to request activation of the torque usage

indicator of the AC compressor.
The parameter value should be adjusted according

to the following table. The default factory setting
is 70 Nm. If the compressor type used is not in the
table, a torque T estimate may be obtained as follows:
When torque usage indicator is active, the engine

and gearbox control units get an indication that the
torque is being removed and can compensate for
this loss.
Activation may be done through a separate input or
via CAN. If the activation is done through CAN, it
is possible to temporarily specify the average
torque size removed.
REQUIREMENT!
If the vehicle is specified with an automatic or

OPC gearbox, the average torque value of the AC
compressor should be specified. Specify the value
in the BBFS form.
T = 0.09 x V x i
Where V is the compressor displacement in cm
and "i" is the gear ratio between the engine speed
and the compressor speed according to:
i = D/d
Where D is the diameter of the engine pulley and d
is the diameter of the AC compressor pulley.
Compressor
Bock FK40 390, Bitzer4UFC,
TM31
Bock FK40 470, Bitzer 4TFC
Bock FK40 560, Bitzer 4PFC
Bock FK40 665, Bock FK50
660, Bitzer 4NFC, Bitzer 6UFC,
Bitzer 6TFC
Bock FK50 775, Bock FK50
830, Bitzer 6PFC
Bock FK50 980, Bitzer 6NFC
Torque
(Nm)
40
50
60
70
90
110
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Activate the torque usage indicator of the AC compressor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
419
Separate connection
Name
Activate torque usage indicator
Connection via CAN
Message: signal
Name
BodyworkPTOControl::PTOTorqueUsageIndicator
BodyworkPTOControl::PTOTorqueUsageRatio
Activate torque usage indicator

Torque removed/torque indicated

Parameter
Value
Description
Average torque
10 to 200 Nm
Average torque. Default at 70 Nm.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Activate the torque usage indicator of the AC compressor
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
420

Deactivate driving light
Description
Separate connection
The function allows driving lights to be automatically switched off when the vehicle is stationary,
so that only the parking lights remain active, for
example at a bus stop.
The driving lights consist of high beam, low beam,

spotlamp, and front and rear foglights.
Name
Connection via CAN
Message: signal
Name
BodyworkVisibilityControl::DeactivateDrivingLights
The vehicle is stationary.
When requested to stop or when the vehicle is

in motion, the lighting control returns to the
controls. This is also done when the power is
turned off.

Parameter
Value
Description
With/without
Here you define if the driving light deactivation can be done remotely.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Deactivate driving light
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
421

External lighting check
Description
Separate connection
Function to control exterior lighting, turning the

different lights on and off automatically according
to a predefined cycle. The function is usually activated by a switch on the instrument panel.
Parking brake engaged.
Warning light signal request not activated.

The function can also be activated when the power
is off.
Name
Activate exterior lights verification
Connection via CAN
Message: signal
Name
ScaniaVehicleStatusMessage1::LightcheckActi- Verification of external lights

vated
The parking brake is released.

The warning light signal request is activated.
The status signal must be used to activate bodywork light verification, while chassis lighting is
verified.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > External lighting check
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
422

Activate remote horn
Description
Separate connection
Function to activate the horn. The function parameter can be set to operate only when the vehicle is
stationary or when it is moving.
The vehicle is stationary (depending on the parameter).

The activation signal is active.
The vehicle is not stationary (depending on the

parameter).
The activation signal is inactive.
Name
Activate horn
Connection via CAN
Message: signal
Name
BodyworkVisibilityControl::HornDemand
Activate horn

Parameter
Value
Condition of vehicle speed for Moving/parking brake

remote control of visibility
engaged
system functions.
Only activate the horn for short periods to protect

people close to the vehicle from the noise.
Description
The parameter specifies whether the horn
or warning light signal can be activated
at speed or if the parking brake is
engaged.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Activate remote horn
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
423

Warning lights signal
Description
Separate connection
Function to activate the warning lights signal.
Name
Activate warning lights signal
The vehicle is stationary (depending on the parameter).

The activation signal is active.
The vehicle is not stationary (depending on the

parameter).
The activation signal is inactive.
Connection via CAN

Message: signal
Name
BodyworkVisibilityControl::HazardDemand
Activate warning lights signal

Parameter
Value
Condition of vehicle speed for Moving/parking brake

remote control of visibility
engaged
system functions.
Description
The parameter specifies whether the horn
or warning light signal can be activated
at speed or if the parking brake is
engaged.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.8 Activatable chassis functions > Warning lights signal
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
424
11.9 Expansion units

General
Some of the vehicle functions are distributed
across both the chassis and the body, e.g., the bus
stop brake, which can be triggered by opening the
door.
If communication between the body and the chassis is discrete, the configurable inputs and outputs
are used in connector C628.
The bus bodybuilder is responsible for installing

and configuring these expansion units.
344 075
However, the number of functions is limited by the

number of pins on the C628 unit. A vehicle that requires more functions than those contained in
C628 can be specified by expansion units 1 to 4 being provided in the materials box accompanying
the chassis.
Expansion unit.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.9 Expansion units > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
425

Installation
The expansion unit is supplied together with an installation kit. The content of this kit is shown in the
table below.
Designation
Scania No.
TE No.
Expansion Unit - 1 piece

39-pin VO sleeve - 1 piece
Electrical connector cover - 1 piece
Plugs - 32 pieces (seals without connectors)
Electrical cord seals from 0.5 to 2.5 mm - 39 pieces
Electrical cable seals 1 to 2.5 mm - 39 pieces
Gold plated pins for electrical cable 0.5 to 1 mm - 13 pieces
Gold plated pins for electrical cable 0.5 to 1 mm - 26 pieces
2 244 629
2 244 575
1 926 640
1 446 825
1 367 260
1 367 259
1 929 962
1 473 860
5-2208684-3
1418882-1
828922-1
828904-1
828905-1
1-968855-2
1-968855-1
Gold plated pins for electrical cable 0.5 to 2.5 mm - 39 pieces

CAN termination, 120 ohms - 1 piece
Connection to the CAN termination - 1 piece
Gold plated pins for 0.75 to 15 mm terminations - 2 pieces
Termination plug - 1 piece
Termination lock - 1 piece
1 849 469
2 204 973
1 786 157
1 361 119
1 342 966
1 349 112
1-968857-1
DT06-3S-EP10
DT04-3P-CE03
1060-16-014
114 017
W3P
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.9 Expansion units > Installation
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
426
Continued from previous page.

Designation
Scania No.
TE No.
Junction block - 1 piece

Junction block connection - 1 piece
Gold plated connection pins - 6 pieces
Junction block plugs - 6 pieces
Junction block lock- 1 piece
2 190 281
1 781 032
1 361 118
1 342 966
1 783 122
DT04-12PA-P027
DT06-12SA-CE11
1062-16-0144
114 017
W12S-P012
Cable terminal tools

Electrical cable:
0.5 to 1 mm, tool: 99 491 C
0.5 to 1.5 mm, tool: 99 496
1.5 to 2.5 mm, tool: 99 494 B-C

B and C inform the measurement of the tool to be
used.
Disassembly tool 99 585
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
427
IP Rating
The expansion unit is classified as IP (IP-67) and
can be installed in a chassis environment. If the installation is done in a chassis environment, sealed
connectors and junction blocks should be used.
The use of twin cables in the same cable terminal
is not allowed.
When installing chassis expansion units, Scania
requirements and BBM recommendations should
be followed.
Expansion unit connector

Pin
Description
Pin
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Not used
Pin 1 ID
Power supply
Configurable input
Pin 2 ID
Configurable input
Configurable input
Pin 3 ID
Configurable input
Configurable input
Pin 4 ID
Configurable input
Ground return to pin 15
Ground ID 1
Configurable output
Ground ID 2
Configurable output
Not used
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Configurable output
Not used
Configurable output
Not used
Configurable output
TCO output
Configurable output
Configurable input
CAN expansion, high
Configurable input
Configurable input
CAN expansion, low
Configurable input
Grounding system
Activate
Not used
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
428
Plating
The average connector line consists of gold plated
pins. All others are tin plated.
2
IMPORTANT!
Do not get the types of pin confused, as this can

lead to major corrosion problems.
10
12
13
15
19
21
22
24
25
27
28
30
31
31
34
36
37
39
344 076
38
Connector diagram.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
429

Connection
Power supply:
Identification:
The expansion unit must be powered by a voltage in accordance with the instructions in
Chapter 11.4.
Fuses and cable cross-section areas must be

selected in accordance with Chapter 11.1.
Grounding system
The expansion unit must be grounded in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 11.5.
Activate:
The activated expansion unit connected to

C627-2 voltage supply 30.
When multiple expansion units are used, they

must be separated by connector pin encoding.
Only the codes listed in the table below are
valid.
ID pin grounding is made from an output ID.
ID
Pin 1 ID
Pin 2 ID
Pin 3 ID
Pin 4 ID
Expansion unit A
Expansion Unit B
Expansion unit C
Expansion unit D
Ground
Open
Open
Open
Open
Ground
Open
Open
Open
Open
Ground
Open
Open
Open
Open
Ground
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.9 Expansion units > Connection
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
430
CAN expansion
344 073
Two expansion units (A and B) connected through CAN

expansions. Sealed terminations can be used.
T=termination, C = CAN bus connection.

C629
C629
348 692
The expansion unit communicates with the chassis

through CAN expansions C629-1 and 3. Requirements and recommendations should be followed as
per the CAN specification. See Chapter 14 Appendix, in the BBM via SAIL.
No expansion unit connected. Termination in C629 and

installed at the factory.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
431
Configurable inputs
Configurable outputs
Configuration
Each expansion unit has 10 configurable tristate

type inputs. They can be configured to be activated
by 24V or grounding.
Each expansion unit has 7 configurable outputs.

All, except the TCO output, are high, active and
24V. The TCO output can be used to generate a remote or speed pulse signal according to ISO
16844-2:2004.
in order to allocate functionality to the inputs and

outputs of an expansion unit, each unit should be
added using BICT. An expansion unit is added according to the following steps:
For example, the outputs can be used to drive a

valve, lamp or as an output signal for a digital signal. If a ground return is necessary for the connected component, the expansion unit ground return
must be used for each output.
2.
For example, the inputs can be used to connect a

three-position switch or a monitor, or as an input
signal to a digital signal.
Pin
Description
4
6
7
9
10
12
31
33
34
36
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Tristate input
Pin
Permitted load
15
0 to 3 A
18
21
24
27
29
30
0 to 3 A
0 to 3 A
0 to 3 A
0 to 3 A
TCO output
0 to 0.5 A
1.
3.
4.
5.
Connect to the vehicle with SDP3.

Select "Edit BIC program." BICT opens.
In BICT, select "Edit and Add/Remove expansion unit" on the sub-menu.
In the dialog box shown, you can add this expansion unit or those that are connected. Press
"OK".
You can now use the expansion unit E/S in
BICT.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
432
11.10 Vehicle information instruments

Vehicle information instruments
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Engine speed measure

Fuel consumption measure
Direction indicators
Warning lights and general indicator lights for
high beam and front foglight.
Speedometer
Gauges for speed and oil pressure
Indicator lights and warning lights
Fuel level gauge
Display
Coolant temperature gauge
Bodybuilder lamps
10
11
11
10
317 632
Cor+
Basic
VDV
Location of instruments on the instrument cluster:
Basic instrument cluster.
Cor+ instrument cluster.
11
317 631
For more information about indicator and indicator

lamps and chassis function warning lights, refer to
the Driver's manual.
317 630
There are three different versions of the instrument

cluster:
VDV type instrument cluster.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Vehicle information instruments
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
433

Sound indicators
Remotely activated buzzer
The remotely activated buzzer function activates a
sound indicator on the instrument cluster.
There are three sounds indicators for the remotely
activated buzzer function. The sound indicators
may be used in various functions. Sound indicators
are activated by the CAN message "Miscellaneous
Proprietary Information 1" and the CAN signal according to the following table.
Sound indicators
CAN signal
Continuous alarm
sound
Continuous sound
warning
Driver Information
Request 18
Driver Information
Request 19
To listen to the sound indicators, refer to the audio

files in Chapter 14 Attachment, in the BBM via
SAIL.
Use sound indicators in situations with risk of injury or serious engine damage. For example, the
indicator sound can be used to represent "Fire
alarm in passenger area".
The indicator sound is repeated while the CAN
signal is active.
Continuous sound warning

Use the sound indicator in situations of lesser severity. For example, the indicator sound can be
used to represent "Driver door open, but parking
brake not engaged."
The indicator sound is repeated while the CAN
signal is active.
Single sound warning
Use the sound indicator for a sound lasting a short
time. The sound indicator is only activated once
the CAN signal is activated.
Single sound warning Driver Information

Request 20
See Chapter 2.4.2.4 in the CAN specification for
more information.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Sound indicators
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
434

Function indication status
Busbuilder indicator lamps and messages have a
different status, depending on the type of information the message should convey.
There are three different statuses:
Alarm
Warning
Information
Meaning
Status
Driver corrective action
Indication
Danger to life or serious risk of injury.

Serious risk of damage to the vehicle or other property.
Risk of vehicle damage.
Function active temporarily or function in a condition
that requires special attention by the driver.
Condition or value of a function that is functioning
normally.
Function active.
Warning
Warning
Act immediately
Act immediately
Red light or against red background.

Red light or against red background.
Warning
Warning
Correct fault as soon as possible.

Yellow lamp or against yellow background.
Pay attention if a function is active. Yellow lamp or against yellow background.
Information
No corrective measure.
Usually white lamp or against white background.
Information
No corrective measure.
Usually white lamp or against white background,

but can also be represented by other colours.
Note:
Sound indicator in combination with the lamp

should only be used for an alarm or warning status.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Function indication status
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
435

Lamps
Bodybuilder lamps
There are ten bus bodybuilder lamps on the instrument cluster.
The bodybuilder lamps can always be activated

with CAN and, depending on chassis specification,
with a separate signal.
Positio
n
Lamp
colour
Yellow
See Chapter 9.6 Instrument panel for more information about the bus bodybuilder lamp symbol
plates.
Yellow
Red
10
Red
325 744
The bus bodybuilder lamps are activated through

the CAN message "Miscellaneous Information
Proprietary 1" and the CAN signal, according to
the following table.
Bus bodybuilder lamps, positions 1 to 10.
Positio
n
Lamp
colour
Yellow
Driver Information
Request 1
Yellow
Blue
Red
Green
Red
Driver Information
Request 2
Driver Information
Request 3
Driver Information
Request 4
Driver Information
Request 5
Driver Information
Request 6
CAN signal
CAN signal
Driver Information
Request 7
Driver Information
Request 8
Driver Information
Request 9
Driver Information
Request 10

more information.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Lamps
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
436
Passenger signals
There are 3 different functions for passenger signals:
Stop signal
Pram signal
Wheelchair signal
Each function activates a specific indicator lamp
and a specific indicator sound. Use the CAN message "BCS Message 4" and the CAN signal according to the following table to activate each
function.
Function
CAN signal
Stop signal
Pram signal
Wheelchair signal
Stop signal
Pram signal
Handicap signal
The sound indicators are only activated once. To

listen to the sound indicators, refer to the audio
files in Chapter 14 Attachment, in the BBM via
SAIL.
It is possible to activate the indicator lamp for each
function or the sound indicator separately.
Only indicator lamp
Specify in the BBFS form if the sound indicator for
the function should be active. The Scania default
setting is active.
Only sound indicator

1.
Deactivate the sound indicator as described

previously.
2. Activate sound indicators with the CAN message "Miscellaneous Proprietary Information
1" and the CAN signal according to the following table.
Function
CAN signal
Stop signal
Driver Information
Request 21
Driver Information
Request 22
Driver Information
Request 22
Pram signal
Wheelchair signal

more information.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Lamps
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
437

Bus bodybuilder indication messages
General
Depending on the chassis specification, it can be
equipped with the feature to activate bus bodybuilder indication messages via CAN interface.
Bus bodybuilder indication messages show chassis
and bodywork information in a clear manner.
There are 15 predefined bus bodybuilder indication messages. Use the CAN message "Miscellaneous Information Proprietary 1" to activate the
messages.
For more information on activation, refer to the
Alarm, Warning and Informational messages options.
The message shows a symbol, a colour and a help

text in the instrument cluster display. The help text
is displayed in all languages supported by Scania
instrument clusters.
A vehicle in normal operation should not have any
active message.
The Driver's manual contains information about
the symbol and help text of each message. Update
the Driver's manual and the Bodywork service
manual with information about the meaning of
messages and how the driver and workshop team
should act.
IMPORTANT!
Think about how and when messages should be activated so that the driver understands all relevant
information:
Activate messages moderately.

Think about how the display will be activated
for the desired action. For example, a defective
sensing strip should not result in a constant
display of the message "sensing strip in door
triggered".
The display should be in accordance with Scania guidelines.
The instrument cluster display differs between
the instrument cluster types VDV, Basic and
Colour+.
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Bus bodybuilder indication messages
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
438
317 073
317 072
For information about how an activated indicator

message appears in the different instrument clusters, see the figures.
VDV type instrument cluster.
317 074
Cor+ instrument cluster.
Basic instrument cluster.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
439
Vehicle priority of indication messages

Bus bodybuilder indication messages are shown in
the same manner and under the same priority rules
as chassis indication messages. A bodywork alarm
has a higher priority than a chassis alarm.
Several messages can be active simultaneously on
the display.
Within each category, messages are prioritized according to the activation time. Regardless of priority, an activated message will display for at least 2
seconds before a new message can be displayed.
Various instrument cluster conditions
If several messages are active simultaneously, the

driver can manually select to see a specific symbol
or help text.
Normal condition
The priority setting for displaying the messages is

as follows:
1.
Alarm
2. Warning
3. Information
The instrument cluster may be in various operating

conditions. The ability to display messages varies
depending on the condition.
The main and voltage 15 switches are activated.

All messages can be displayed when the instrument cluster is in normal condition.
Deactivated condition
The instrument cluster will be in deactivated condition if:
The main switch is turned off.
The requirements for normal or limited condition are not met.

No message can be displayed when the instrument
cluster is in deactivated condition.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
440
Limited condition
Note:
When the instrument cluster is in limited condition, it is only possible to activate certain selected
messages.
If the instrument cluster is in limited condition and

a message is activated, the instrument will remain
in limited condition while the message is activated.
For more information about messages that can also

be activated in limited condition, see the information below for each message.
An activated message keeps the instrument cluster

turned on for an indefinite period even if the connection point C697-12 is deactivated. The instrument cluster changes to a deactivated condition if
the main switch is turned off.
The instrument cluster can be in limited condition

in two different ways.
1.
The main and voltage 15 switches are connected, then the voltage 15 is turned off. The instrument cluster will be in limited condition
for 5 minutes before moving to a deactivated
condition.
2. The main switch is turned on, the voltage 15
disabled and the connection point C697-12 is
active. The instrument cluster is in limited
condition, while the connection point C697-12
is active.
If the connection point C697-12 is deactivated,
the instrument cluster will be in limited condition for another 5 minutes before moving to a
deactivated condition.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
441

Alarm messages
Sensing strip in door triggered
Fire in the passenger area
Emergency exit open
Use the message to inform the driver that someone

is trapped in the door. It is possible to activate the
message even if the instrument cluster is in limited
condition.
Use the message to inform the driver that a fire has

been detected in the passenger area. It is possible
to activate the message even if the instrument cluster is in limited condition.
Some vehicles are equipped with special doors that

are only used as an emergency exit. Use the message to inform the driver that the emergency exit is
open.
It is possible to activate the message even if the instrument cluster is in limited condition.
Help text
CAN signal
Use the message along with the sound indicator for

a continuous alarm sound.
Sensing strip
in door triggered
Driver Information
Request 17
For information about the continuous sound alarm,

refer to Chapter 11.6 Communication between
chassis and bodywork.
Help text
Symbol
CAN signal
Driver InforFire in the pasmation

senger area
Request 23
316 235
Symbol
316 236
316 232
Symbol
Help text
CAN signal
Emergency
exit open
Driver Information
Request 24
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Alarm messages
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
442
Door open while driving
The message is an addition to the display of the

factory default open door message.
Use the message to inform the driver that the air

pressure in the doors is so low that there is risk of
injury.
316 234
Symbol
Help text
CAN signal
Door open
Driver Information
Request 25
Symbol
316 233
Use the message in a situation in which the driver

needs to be clearly advised that a door is open. For
example, when the door is open and the vehicle is
moving.
Help text
CAN signal
Driver Information
Request 26
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Alarm messages
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
443

Warning messages
Bodywork system error
Door failure
Driver door open
Use the message to inform the driver about a bodywork system error.
Use the message to inform the driver about a fault

in the door system.
Use the message to inform the driver that the driver's door is open.
CAN signal
Bodywork
system error
Driver Information
Request 12
Symbol
Help text
CAN signal
Door failure
Driver Information
Request 13
Symbol
316 243
Help text
316 244
316 245
Symbol
Help text
CAN signal
Driver door
open
Driver Information
Request 14
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Warning messages
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
444
Toilet alarm
Luggage compartment alarm

requests the driver's attention from the toilet.

wants to alert the driver from the luggage compartment.
Use the message to inform the driver about a climate system error.
CAN signal
Toilet alarm
Driver Information
Request 15
Symbol
Help text
CAN signal
Luggage com- Driver Inforpartment

mation
alarm
Request 16
Symbol
316 246
Help text
316 241
316 242
Symbol
Help text
CAN signal
Driver Information
Request 11
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Warning messages
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
445

Informative messages
Stop signal and wheelchair signal
Note:
Use the stop signal message to inform the driver

that a passenger wants to exit the vehicle.
There is no guarantee that the symbol and the help

text will be visible the whole time the CAN signal
is active.
Use the wheelchair signal message to inform the

driver that a passenger in need of supervised bus
descent wants to leave the vehicle.
Symbol
Symbol
316 239
Activate the message together with the normal display or separately. In separate activation, the sound
indicator is activated at the same time as the message.
CAN signal
Stop signal
Driver Information
Request 27
Help text
CAN signal
Wheelchair
signal
Driver Information
Request 28
316 240
The messages are complementary to the normal

display with sound and lamp indicators for the stop
and wheelchair signals.
Help text
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Informative messages
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
446
Drinking water tank level low
Wastewater tank level high
Use the message to inform the driver that the level

of the drinking water tank is low.
Use the message to inform the driver that the level

of the wastewater tank is high.
Help text
CAN signal
Drinking
water tank
level low
Driver Information
Request 29
Symbol
Help text
316 237
344 093
Symbol
CAN signal
Driver InforWastewater
mation
tank level high
Request 30
BBM F > 11 Electrical system > 11.10 Vehicle information instruments > Informative messages
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
447
Exterior
12.1 Plates
Scania Mark
The Scania logotype plates go on the chassis accessory box. A total of 5 plates in three different
sizes and in two different layout variations are provided. If necessary, additional plates can be ordered.
They are made from a flexible plastic material with
a self-adhesive back, and are designed to be attached to the front, at the sides and the rear section
without the use of screws or rivets.
REQUIREMENT!
The Scania bus components should not have competitor marks. Only Scania and the bodybuilder
marks are permitted.
233 mm
466 mm
REQUIREMENT!
When the symbol and the logo are used in combination, only the original appearance is permitted,
see figure.
164,5 mm
If the symbol and the logo are positioned separately, the recommended positions to be followed can
be found in the next pages.
329 mm
306 mm
337 733
153 mm
BBM F > 12 Exterior > 12.1 Plates > Scania Mark

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
449
12.1 Plates
Recommended positions for the Scania

mark
332 078
337 734
332 077
332 079
Below are the recommended positions for placing

on the front part of the bus.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
450
12.1 Plates
332 075
332 076
Below are the recommended positions for placing

on the rear and side of the bus.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
451
12.2 Wheels
General
REQUIREMENT!
Protect the following components so that they are

clean and intact, and free from paint or similar on
vehicle delivery.
tyres
wheel nuts
wheel nut caps
wheel studs
hub caps
rims
BBM F > 12 Exterior > 12.2 Wheels > General

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
452
12.2 Wheels
Wheel housing
The wheel housings are not included in the Scania
chassis, they are the bodybuilder's responsibility.
Fire protection, wheel housing

1
REQUIREMENT!
2
3
4
To reduce wheel housing water spray, a reducing

blanket can be attached to the internal side of the
wheel housings. A rubber moulding can also be attached to the end of the body, next to the wheel
housing arc. The rubber moulding minimises the
water spray from the wheel housings.
320 773
The minimum dimensions specified in the chassis

dimension drawings must be maintained. If snow
chains are needed, the minimum dimension must
be increased to leave room for them.
For more information about measurements and dimensions, see the main dimensions schemes provided in BBM via SAIL.
Wheel housing splash
1. Blanket
2. Insulation
3. Sheet steel
4. Aluminium sheet
Nearby components of the wheel housings

(wheels, multi-leaf spring, suspension springs,
etc.) must be accessible for maintenance. If not accessible internally by opening the wheel housing,
there must be an inspection hatch inside. For further information, see chapter 10 Access during repair and maintenance.
Scania recommends a structure with a steel plate

for the upper part of the wheel housings and an aluminium sheet above the wheels to avoid propagation of the wheel housing fire to the passenger
area.
In case of double mounting, Scania recommends
that the wheel housing steel plates are connected to
the chassis side members.
BBM F > 12 Exterior > 12.2 Wheels > Wheel housing

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
453
12.2 Wheels
Wheel housing with metalic suspension Front axle
REQUIREMENT!
Follow the minimal principal dimensions as indicated in the schemes for the height of the wheel
housing (1).
351 316
351 315
1. Wheel housing (see main dimensions schemes)
1. Wheel housing arch

A. Minimum 620 mm

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
454
12.2 Wheels
REQUIREMENT!
339 617
With the bus in drive mode, the distance between

the tyre and the edge of the wheel housing arch
should be at least B, with B=A+25 mm
1
1. Multi-leaf spring clamps
If snow chains are used, this dimension must be increased so that there is space for the snow chains.
A. Distance between the lower flange of the side member and the highest point of the multi-leaf spring clamp
3
2
351 317
2. Wheel housing arch with rubber trim

B = A+25 mm

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
455
12.2 Wheels
Wheel housing with metalic suspension Rear axle
REQUIREMENT!
351 316
1. Wheel housing (see main dimensions schemes)
353 207
Follow the minimal principal dimensions as indicated in the schemes for the height of the wheel
housing (1).
1. Wheel housing arch

A. Minimum 600 mm

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
456
12.2 Wheels
REQUIREMENT!
With the bus in drive mode, the distance between

the tyre and the edge of the wheel housing arch
should be at least B, with B=A+25 mm
339 582
If snow chains are used, this dimension must be increased so that there is space for the snow chains.
1. Metallic stop.
A. Distance between the metallic stop and the flat axle
surface.
3
2
351 317
2. Wheel housing arch with rubber trim

B = A+25 mm

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
457
12.2 Wheels
Wheel housing with pneumatic

suspension
Check the clearance between the tyre and the end
of the wheel housing, by releasing air from the air
chambers.
2
1
REQUIREMENT!
A
339 600
With maximum airbag deflection, the distance between the tyre and the outer point of the wheel
housing should be 25 mm. If snow chains are used,
this dimension must be increased so that there is
space for the snow chains.
1. Wheel housing.
2. Rubber strip.
A. 25 mm.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
458
12.2 Wheels
Movement of the front axles and driving

with metallic suspension
IMPORTANT!
According to the chassis load, there is a backward

movement up to 30 mm (A) in relation to the theoretical centre line of the axles.
This movement should be considered for the positioning of the bodywork wheel arch.
341 753
Distance A may vary 30 mm.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
459
12.2 Wheels
Panels on the wheel housing

Panels which cover part of the tyres reduce the air
flow around the brakes and tyres. This involves increased risk of tyre explosion and should therefore
be avoided.
IMPORTANT!
A panel which covers the tyres can cause overheating and tyre explosion.
In the event of a tyre explosion the panel could
split and create dangerous projectiles which risk
injuring passers-by.
Wheel without covering panel.
Wheel with covering panel.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
460
12.2 Wheels
Front right hand side wheel housing 8x2 (F

bi-articulated)
Prepare the wheel housings so that they are designed with clearance between the wheel and the
wheel housing, when the chassis is in its lowest position, with a total deflection angle of the wheels
and considering the maximum swing of the front
axle.
The 8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis is delivered with

a heat deflector on the front axle of the right-hand
side to protect the suspension components, brake
and tire.
341 786
For more information on the maximum lengths and

dimensions for the wheel housing, see the drawing
of key dimensions in BBM via SAIL.
Heat deflector
REQUIREMENT!
The heat deflector should be fixed onto the body

structure via the 3 holes (1).

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
461
12.2 Wheels
Front right hand side wheel housing 8x2 (F

bi-articulated)
The wheel housing should be designed and structured so as to allow the mounting of the driver's
seat
Note:
When building the wheel housing, the ergonomic

requirements of the driver seat must be considered,
for this see chapter 9.2 Ergonomics.
347 048
For more information on the maximum lengths and

dimensions for the wheel housing, see the drawing
of key dimensions in BBM via SAIL.
1. Body floor
2. Wheel housing

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
462
12.2 Wheels
Mudflap
The chassis can be ordered together with mudflaps
with Scania's logotype. Mudflaps are supplied to
the bus bodybuilder enclosed in the accessory box.
REQUIREMENT!
When installing the mudflaps supplied in the accessory box, the distance from mudflaps to ground
must comply with the values shown in the figures
at the side.
For buses with a F 6x2 wheel configuration, the

mudflaps must be fitted at the front and tag axles.
For buses with a 8x2 (F bi-articulated) wheel configuration, the mudflaps must be fitted on all axles.
A
Buses with a F 4x2 wheel configuration.
A. 100 mm.
B. 140 mm.
332 985
For buses with a F 4x2 wheel configuration, the

mudflaps must be fitted at the front and rear axles.
332 986
Bus with a F 6x2 wheel configuration.

A. 100 mm.
B. 140 mm.
BBM F > 12 Exterior > 12.2 Wheels > Mudflap

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
463
12.2 Wheels
Note:
Scania mudflaps are optional, and upon customer

request, they are sent in the accessory box.
IMPORTANT!
A
A
347 045
Install the mudflaps when the vehicle is at normal

driving level.
Bus with 8x2 (F bi-articulated) wheel configuration.

A. 120 mm.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
464
12.2 Wheels
1. Mudflaps.
2. Attachment surface.
3. Attachment screws.
4. Smooth sheet steel (approx. 3 mm).
5. Rubber skirt.

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
465
12.2 Wheels
Hub caps
Depending on the specification, the chassis can be
supplied with hub caps and wheel nut caps with
Scania's logotype.
REQUIREMENT!
Fit the hub caps and wheel nut caps supplied in the
chassis accessory box.
IMPORTANT!
If the chassis is supplied without hub caps and the

bus bodybuilder wishes to install its own hub caps,
the hub caps used must be designed to support tyre
explosions.
REQUIREMENT!
The hub cap is optional, and upon customer request, it is sent in the accessory box.
If there is a tyre explosion, a hub cap of deficient

design can fragment and create dangerous projectiles endangering people nearby.
Note:
Scania does not recommend the use of full cover

hub caps for buses in city traffic. Full cover hub
caps could lead to poor cooling of the brakes when
driving with frequent stops.
BBM F > 12 Exterior > 12.2 Wheels > Hub caps

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
466
12.2 Wheels
Axle weight and tyre pressure
Axle weight
REQUIREMENT!
The bus bodybuilder must ensure that the maximum load on the axles and tyres is not exceeded
when the theoretical weight of the vehicle is calculated, i.e. including passengers and maximum
load.
IMPORTANT!
Always verify both the axle weight and the tyre

load index, the minimum weight specified is the
limiting factor. The tyre load index can be the limiting factor.
For more information about axle weight, see the
next page.
For more information about which axle is applicable for the chassis in question, refer to Web SPII
via SAIL.
BBM F > 12 Exterior > 12.2 Wheels > Axle weight and tyre pressure
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
467
12.2 Wheels
Chassis type
Front axle
Max. front axle weight (kg)
F HZ/NZ 4x2
F NZ 4x2
F HZ 6x2
AM 920
AM 860
AM 920
AMA 860
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
Chassis type
1st central axis
Maximum load on 1 central axis (kg)
ASA 1300
12,000
Chassis type
2nd central axis
Maximum load on 2nd central axis (kg)
ASA 1300
12,000
Chassis type
Rear axle
Max. rear axle weight (kg)
F HZ 4x2
F NZ 4x2
AD 1300
AD 1300
ADA 1501P
12,000
12,000
12,000
Chassis type
Rear axle
Tag axle
Bogie weight (ton)
F HZ 6x2
ADA 1300
ASA 700
19 (12 + 7)
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
468
12.2 Wheels
Tyre marking
1
6
7
10
309 816
The figure explains the marking on the tyre.
1. Section width in millimetres.

2. Profile height as a percentage of section width.
3. R means radial tyre (a dash means diagonal construction).
4. Wheel rim diameter in inches.
5. Load index for single mounting.
6. Load index for double mounting.
7. Speed index
8. Alternative load and speed indices.
9. Certificate in accordance with ECE regulations.
10. Air pressure at maximum load.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
469
12.2 Wheels
Tyre pressure
To find more information about minimum tyre
pressure for different tyre size combinations and
axle weights, see the tables further forward in this
section. The tyre pressure tables are expressed in
the unit bar and valid for cold tyres.
Conversion table between bar and psi pressure

units.
bar
psi
1.00
5.00
5.25
5.50
5.75
6.00
6.25
6.50
6.75
7.00
7.25
7.50
7.75
8.00
8.25
8.50
8.75
9.00
14.5
72.5
76.0
80.0
83.5
87.0
90.5
94.0
98.0
101.5
105.0
109.0
112.5
116.0
119.5
123.0
127.0
130.5
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
470
12.2 Wheels
Tyre pressure
Dimension
Min. tyre pressure at max.

axle weight (bar)
Max. axle weight, single

mounting (kg)
Max. axle weight, twin

mounting (kg)
Max. load capacity/tyre (kg)
295/80 R 22.5
315/80 R 22.5
8.6
8.6 (8.0)b
7100a
8,000
12,600
13,400
3550
4000
a. The load indicated is valid for speeds above 70 km/h. If the speed is limited to 70 km/h, the maximum load to be considered will be 7,500 kg.
b. Within brackets indicates tyre pressure for twin mounting. For other tyres the same minimum tyre pressure applies for single and twin mounting.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
471
12.2 Wheels
Tyre pressure, continued

Dimension
Lowest recommended tyre pressure

(bar)
Single mounting: maximum

permitted axle weight for this tyre
pressure (kg)
Twin mounting: maximum permitted

axle weight for this tyre pressure (kg)
295/80 R 22.5
315/80 R 22.5
5.5
5.5
4800
5410
8510
9570
Note:
The information in the two tables above has been

retrieved from Michelin. There may be deviations
between different tyre manufacturers.
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
472
12.2 Wheels
Load index
Speed index
The load index symbol is displayed on the side of

the tyre. See figure at the beginning of the section.
Load index (LI) is an industry standard that establishes the maximum load on a vehicle tyre.
The speed symbol is displayed on the side of the

tyre. See figure at the beginning of the section. The
speed value is the tyre's maximum speed.
Speed index
Speed (km/
h)
4500
4625
4750
4875
5000
5150
D
E
F
G
J
K
65
70
80
90
100
110
5300
5450
5600
5800
L
M
N
120
130
140
LI
kg
LI
kg
LI
kg
LI
kg
130
131
132
133
134
135
1900
1950
2000
2060
2120
2180
140
141
142
143
144
145
2500
2575
2650
2725
2800
2900
150
151
152
153
154
155
3350
3450
3550
3650
3750
3875
160
161
162
163
164
165
136
137
138
139
2240
2300
2360
2430
146
147
148
149
3000
3075
3150
3250
156
157
158
159
4000
4125
4250
4375
166
167
168
169
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
473
12.2 Wheels
Wheel installation
Install the wheel nuts using the installation method
described below:
wheels mounted for transport

wheels removed during bodybuilding
REQUIREMENT!
Tighten the wheel nuts in the sequence shown in

the figure.
1.
First, tighten the wheel nuts to a tightening

torque of 60 Nm.
2. Then tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 650
50 Nm.
6
9
3
2 7
8 1
4
10
5
319 486
Use a torque wrench to tighten the wheel nuts.
BBM F > 12 Exterior > 12.2 Wheels > Wheel installation

Issue 2015.4 en-GB
474
Legal requirements and certificates
13.1 Certificates and legal requirements

General
The bus bodybuilder is responsible, together with
the distributor in the customer's country, for all
documentation concerning the functionality, operation and maintenance of the finished bus.
For the sale of the finished bus, the distributor is
responsible to the customer for ensuring that it has
been body built in accordance with Scania's instructions and that in other respects the vehicle
meets the national legal requirements and safety
regulations in force.
BBM F > 13 Legal requirements and certificates > 13.1 Certificates and legal requirements > General
Issue 2015.4 en-GB
476

BBM en-GB 2015.4

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

BBM en-GB 2015.4

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Bus Builders Manual

1.1 Scania's business concept and environmental policy

1.1 Scania's business concept and environmental policy

For further information on Scania's regulations for

1.2 Scania's bus bodybuilding instructions

Modifications of the chassis or its systems, which

Bus bodybuilding instructions

1.2 Scania's bus bodybuilding instructions

Note the warning symbols

Used when incorrect action may result in a poor

Used when incorrect action may result in personal

Used when incorrect action may result in damage

1.2 Scania's bus bodybuilding instructions

The bus bodybuilder's responsibility

The distributor's responsibility

The bus bodybuilder is answerable to its customer

For the sale of the finished bus, the distributor is

The bus bodybuilder assumes all responsibility for

1.3 Chassis modification

Modifications to the chassis or its systems, which

Modifications not approved by Scania are the sole

The bodybuilder sends a deviation request to

1.3 Chassis modification

Creating a deviation request

Enter the SAIL portal (https://sail.scania.com). Click on Bus Builders Manual

1.3 Chassis modification

1.4 BBFS (Bus Builders Function Settings)

1.4 BBFS (Bus Builders Function Settings)

How to find BBFS

Enter the SAIL portal (https://sail.scania.com). Click on Bus Builders Manual

1.4 BBFS (Bus Builders Function Settings)

Select "14 Appendix" in Chapter (2).

Select the language (3).

Click "Search" (4).

1.4 BBFS (Bus Builders Function Settings)

Final function settings and inspections must be

The BBMQA is mandatory and a condition for the

For the settings to be correct the bus bodybuilder

1.6 Transport damage

Transport damage claims with Scania

BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.6 Transport damage > General

1.7 Vehicle Optimiser

Load and passenger capacity.

Turning radiuses and accessibility.

BBM F > 1 Introduction > 1.7 Vehicle Optimiser > General

Preparations before bus bodybuilding

2.1 Type designations

H - Short or long distances, irregular, paved or

A - For articulated buses.

2.2 Removing the chassis

Make sure that no cables or pipes are damaged

Lifting with cables

Typical configuration of cables for lifting the chassis.

2.2 Removing the chassis

Exercise the greatest caution during all driving of

1. Parking brake interlock valve

Before discharging the chassis by steering it, you

2.2 Removing the chassis

If the engine does not start for some reason, the

4x2 and 6x2 Chassis

8x2 (F bi-articulated) chassis

If there is no hydraulic pressure the power steering

1. Joint for external air filling